BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and
Maintenance Guide
BCM 4.0
Business Communications Manager
Document Status: Standard
Document Version: 02.3
Part Code: N0060612
Date: October 2006
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
SOFTWARE LICENSE
NORTEL NETWORKS INC. (“NORTEL NETWORKS”) TELECOMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
THIS LEGAL DOCUMENT IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT ("License") BETWEEN YOU, THE END-USER
("CUSTOMER") AND NORTEL NETWORKS. PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING
THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU, THE CUSTOMER, ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, RETURN THE
UNUSED SOFTWARE AND THE ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO NORTEL NETWORKS THROUGH A
NORTEL NETWORKS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF YOUR ACQUISITION OF
THE SOFTWARE FOR A REFUND.
Subject to the terms hereinafter set forth, NORTEL NETWORKS grants
to CUSTOMER and/or its representatives, with a "need to know," a
personal, non-exclusive license (1) to use the licensed software,
proprietary to NORTEL NETWORKS or its suppliers and (2) to use the
associated documentation. CUSTOMER is granted no title or ownership
rights, in or to the licensed software, in whole or in part, and CUSTOMER
acknowledges that title to and all copyrights, patents, trade secrets and/or
any other intellectual property rights to and in all such licensed software
and associated documentation are and shall remain the property of
NORTEL NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS’ suppliers. The
right to use licensed software may be restricted by a measure of usage of
applications based upon number of lines, number of ports, number of
terminal numbers assigned, number of users, or some similar measure.
Expansion beyond the specified usage level may require payment of an
incremental charge or another license fee.
•
Affix to each copy of licensed software made by it, in the same form
and location, a reproduction of the copyright notices, trademarks, and
all other proprietary legends and/or logos of NORTEL NETWORKS
and/or NORTEL NETWORKS’ suppliers, appearing on the original
copy of such licensed software delivered to CUSTOMER; and retain
the same without alteration on all original copies; and
•
•
Issue instructions to each of its authorized employees, agents and/or
representatives to whom licensed software is disclosed, advising
them of the confidential nature of such licensed software and to
provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License; and
Return the licensed software and all copies through an Authorized
Distributor to NORTEL NETWORKS at such time as the
CUSTOMER chooses to permanently cease using it.
NORTEL NETWORKS considers the licensed software to contain "trade
secrets" of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or its suppliers. Such "trade
secrets" include, without limitation thereto, the specific design, structure
and logic of individual licensed software programs, their interactions with
other portions of licensed software, both internal and external, and the
programming techniques employed therein. In order to maintain the "trade
secret" status of the information contained within the licensed software,
the licensed software is being delivered to CUSTOMER in object code
form only.
CUSTOMER shall not:
•
•
•
•
Use licensed software (i) for any purpose other than CUSTOMER’s
own internal business purposes and (ii) other than as provided by this
License; or
Allow anyone other than CUSTOMER’s employees, agents and/or
representatives with a "need to know" to have physical access to
licensed software; or
NORTEL NETWORKS or any of its suppliers holding any intellectual
property rights in any licensed software, and/or any third party owning
any intellectual property rights in software from which the licensed
software was derived, are intended third party beneficiaries of the License.
All grants of rights to use intellectual property intended to be
accomplished by this License are explicitly stated. No other grants of such
rights shall be inferred or shall arise by implication.
Make any copies of licensed software except such limited number of
object code copies in machine readable form only, as may be
reasonably necessary for execution or archival purposes only; or
Make any modifications, enhancements, adaptations, or translations
to or of licensed software, except as may result from those
CUSTOMER interactions with the licensed software associated with
normal use and explained in the associated documentation; or
CUSTOMER warrants to NORTEL NETWORKS that CUSTOMER is
not purchasing the rights granted by this License in anticipation of
reselling those rights.
•
•
Attempt to reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate,
decompile, or in any other manner decode licensed software, in order
to derive the source code form or for any other reason; or
CUSTOMER shall:
Make full or partial copies of any documentation or other similar
printed or machine-readable matter provided with licensed software
unless the same has been supplied in a form by NORTEL
NETWORKS intended for periodic reproduction of partial copies; or
•
Hold the licensed software in confidence for the benefit of NORTEL
NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS’ suppliers using no
less a degree of care than it uses to protect its own most confidential
and valuable information; and
•
Export or re-export licensed software and/or associated
documentation by downloading or otherwise from the fifty states of
the United States and the District of Columbia.
•
•
Keep a current record of the location of each copy of licensed
software made by it; and
Install and use each copy of licensed software only on a single CPU
at a time (for this purpose, single CPU shall include systems with
redundant processing units); and
PLEASE REFER TO THE NEXT PAGE
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Except for Java Product (as defined herein below), CUSTOMER may
assign collectively its rights under this License to any subsequent owner
of the associated hardware, but not otherwise, subject to the payment of
the then current license fee for new users, if any. No such assignment shall
be valid until CUSOMTER (1) has delegated all of its obligations under
this License to the assignee; and (2) has obtained from the assignee an
unconditional written assumption of all such obligations; and (3) has
provided NORTEL NETWORKS a copy of such assignment, delegation
and assumption; and (4) has transferred physical possession of all licensed
software and all associated documentation to the assignee and destroyed
all archival copies. Except as provided, neither this License nor any rights
acquired by CUSTOMER through this License are assignable. Any
attempted assignment of rights and/or transfer of licensed software not
specifically allowed shall be void and conclusively presumed a material
breach of this License.
The rights and obligations arising under this License shall be construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee. If for any reason a
court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or
portion thereof to be unenforceable, that provision of the License shall be
enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of
the parties and the remainder of this License shall continue in full force
and effect.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to the use of the licensed software and the associated
documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous
understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject
matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding
unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of
NORTEL NETWORKS.
If NORTEL NETWORKS (i) claims a material breach of this License, and
(ii) provides written notice of such claimed material breach to
CUSTOMER and (iii) observes that such claimed material breach remains
uncorrected and/or unmitigated more than thirty (30) days following
CUSTOMER’s receipt of written notice specifying in reasonable detail
the nature of the claimed material breach, then CUSTOMER
acknowledges that this License may be immediately terminated by
NORTEL NETWORKS and CUSTOMER further acknowledges that any
such termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights and
remedies that NORTEL NETWORKS may have at law or in equity.
EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTIES FOR ANY ITEM OF LICENSED
SOFTWARE, IF ANY, WILL BE SOLELY THOSE GRANTED
DIRECTLY TO CUSTOMER BY DISTRIBUTOR. OTHER THAN AS
SET FORTH THEREIN, THIS LICENSE DOES NOT CONFER ANY
WARRANTY TO CUSTOMER FROM OR BY NORTEL NETWORKS.
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NORTEL
NETWORKS "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
OR NATURE, WRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING
(WITHOUT
LIMITATION)
THE
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THIS LIMITATION OF WARRNATIES WAS
A
MATERIAL
FACTOR IN THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE LICENSE FEE
CHARGED FOR EACH SPECIFIC ITEM OF SOFTWARE
LICENSED.
IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS AND/OR NORTEL
NETWORKS’ SUPPLIERS AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO OR THROUGH
CUSTOMER
FOR
INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT,
SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR
BUSINESS INFORMATION, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR
OTHER ECONOMIC DAMAGE, AND FURTHER INCLUDING
INJURY TO PROPERTY, AS A RESULT OF USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR BREACH OF ANY
WARRANTY OR OTHER TERM OF THIS LICENSE, REGARDLESS
OF WHETHER NORTEL NETWORKS AND/OR NORTEL
NETWORKS’ SUPPLIERS WERE ADVISED, HAD OTHER REASON
TO KNOW, OR IN FACT KNEW OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
Restricted Rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States
government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Right in
Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS
252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Task List
5
Task List
Installing the BCM main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
To attach the rack-mount brackets................................................................................93
To install the BCM main unit on a table or shelf............................................................99
To connect the expansion unit to the main unit...........................................................104
To select trunk MBMs..................................................................................................106
To install an MBM in the BCM main unit or expansion unit.........................................136
Connecting the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
To connect the BCM system to the WAN....................................................................157
To connect the modem................................................................................................157
To connect the ATA2...................................................................................................169
To install an auxiliary ringer.........................................................................................173
To connect an external music source..........................................................................176
To connect the Ethernet crossover cable....................................................................178
To display the configuration menus.............................................................................180
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Task List
To enter the keycodes.................................................................................................188
To select the region.....................................................................................................189
To enter a keycode......................................................................................................195
To configure DHCP server settings.............................................................................199
To configure IP Phones...............................................................................................200
To configure SNMP settings........................................................................................201
To create user accounts..............................................................................................203
To customize a Startup Profile for your system .........................................................207
To monitor disk mirroring.............................................................................................226
To shut down the system software..............................................................................231
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Task List
7
To restore the system to operation..............................................................................232
To remove the base function tray................................................................................235
To install the base function tray...................................................................................236
To install the advanced function tray...........................................................................243
To remove the main unit top cover..............................................................................245
To install the main unit top cover.................................................................................246
To remove an MBM.....................................................................................................250
To install an MBM........................................................................................................252
Replacing the hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
To replace a RAID configuration hard disk..................................................................257
To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit ..............................................259
To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 main unit ..............................................260
To install a hard disk cage...........................................................................................262
To install a hard disk cage...........................................................................................263
To remove a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage .........................................268
To install a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage...........................................270
To initialize the hard disk in a single disk configuration...............................................273
To install a BCM200 standard power supply...............................................................278
To install a BCM400 standard power supply...............................................................284
To remove the WAN card............................................................................................301
To install a replacement WAN card.............................................................................303
To remove the media services card (MSC).................................................................304
To install the media services card (MSC) ................................................................306
To remove the modem card .......................................................................................307
To remove the processor expansion card (PEC) .......................................................313
To install a PEC...........................................................................................................315
To remove a DIMM card..............................................................................................317
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Task List
To remove a BCM400 cooling fan...............................................................................324
To install a BCM400 cooling fan..................................................................................326
To remove a BCM200 cooling fan...............................................................................329
To install a BCM200 cooling fan..................................................................................331
To install an expansion unit fan...................................................................................334
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
9
Contents
North American regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Canadian Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
EMI/EMC (FCC Part 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Important safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Enhanced 911 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radio-frequency interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Telecommunication registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ITU standardization compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Introducing the BCM hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Main units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
BCM400 advanced function tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Base function tray faceplate components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Base function tray internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Main card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Data networking components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
BCM expansion unit (BCM400 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Contents
MBM bays and backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Media bay modules (MBMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Trunk media bay modules (MBMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Station media bay modules (MBMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Specialized media bay modules (MBMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
BCM components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
BCM power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Uninterruptable power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Field replaceable units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Telephones and adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Media bay module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
BRIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Site telephony wiring requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Digital loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Analog loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Basic hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Other hardware and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Unpacking the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
11
Installing the main unit in an equipment rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Installing the main unit on a flat surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Unpacking the expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installing the expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selecting MBMs for your BCM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Selecting trunk MBMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Selecting a fiber expansion module (FEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Understanding DS30 numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setting offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Determining bus requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Assigning DS30 resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Choosing the assigned order for MBMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Determining MBM DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setting MBM DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Assigning line and extension numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
DTM switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BRI switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
CTM switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
GATM switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4x16 switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ASM 8 and GASM8 switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
DSM switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
FEM switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
BCM400 expansion gateway MBMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Installing an MBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Connecting power to the BCM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wiring the MBMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Connect the MBMs to service providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 Contents
Wiring MBMs to internal connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Wiring the FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting DNs and port numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
MBM combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Combining CTMs/GATMs and 4x16s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
DECT combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Changing configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Connecting the data networking hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Connecting the cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Installing the cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
System telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Central Answering Position (CAP/eCAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Telephone port and DN cross-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Installing an emergency telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Moving telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Analog data device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Installing the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Connecting the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Mounting the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Test insertion loss measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring the ATA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Activating auxiliary ringer programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Connecting the external paging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Connecting an external music source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
13
Data parameter requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Using the default BCM system IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Setting the crossover connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Connecting through the serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Null modem cable setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Software keycode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configuring the BCM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Initial parameters overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuring the initial parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configuring the initial parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Startup Profile requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Configuring basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Startup Profile times and LED sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Configuring the media bay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Configuring modem settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking for software updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Configuring voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Customizing security policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Performing a backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 Contents
System status display LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Monitoring media bay module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Monitoring the RAID LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
RAID disk mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
BCM system does not function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Emergency telephone does not function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ATA2 does not function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Performing a system shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Restarting the system after maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Base function tray maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Advanced function tray maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Using the backup and restore utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Removing an MBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Installing an MBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Installing a RAID system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
15
Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Replacing a standard power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Removing a BCM200 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Upgrading to a redundant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Installing a power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Removing a power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Replacing the processor expansion card (PEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Installing a processor expansion card (PEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Replacing a cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Removing a BCM400 cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 Contents
Installing a BCM400 cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Removing a BCM200 cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Market profile attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Media bay module availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
FEM MBM–Norstar trunk cartridge combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Time zones and language information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Time and date format based on language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Core parameters for market profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Global analog trunk parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
ISDN line services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Analog and digital trunk types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Regulatory information
Refer to the following sections for regulatory information on the BCM system:
•
•
North American regulatory information
This Class A device complies with Part 68 & Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES-003 Class A
Canadian EMI requirements. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect
the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections
of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as
appropriate.
Do not attempt to repair this equipment. If you experience trouble, write for warranty and repair
information:
USA
Canada
Nortel
Nortel Repair Service Centre 30
30 Norelco Drive
Weston Ontario, Canada
M9L 2X6
640 Massman Drive
Nashville, TN, USA
37210
For warranty and repair service outside the USA or Canada, please contact your distributor.
Canadian Notice
The Industry Canada designation identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Regulatory information
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice
FCC registration number: This telephone equipment complies with Part 68, Rules and
Regulations, of the FCC for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network.
Your connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network must comply with these FCC rules:
•
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to
the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance
with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. See
installation instructions for details.
•
•
Use only an FCC Part 68-compliant Universal Service Order Code (USOC) network interface
jack, as specified in the installation instructions, to connect to the Public Switched Telephone
Network.
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required. But if advance
notice isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. You will also
be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC, if you believe it is necessary.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The REN provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5.
EMI/EMC (FCC Part 15)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regulatory information 19
Important safety instructions
The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product. Read carefully and
retain for future reference.
Installation
Warning: To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage
observe the following precautions when installing telephone equipment:
•
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
•
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. The exclamation
point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions
in the literature accompanying the product.
Use
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1
2
3
Read and understand all instructions.
Follow the instructions marked on the product.
Unplug this product (or host equipment) from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use
liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. The product may fall, causing
serious damage to the product.
This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product
should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will
be abused by persons walking on it.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric
shock.
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
10 To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product, but have it sent to a
qualified service person when some service or repair work is required.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Regulatory information
11 Unplug this product (or host equipment) from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified
service personnel under the following conditions:
a
b
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
If the product has been exposed to rain, water or liquid has been spilled on the product,
disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates; but do not open up the
product.
c
d
If the product housing has been damaged.
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Caution: To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords, plugs, jacks,
and the telephone, do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures.
Warning: Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a
wall or baseboard jack. Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible
damage to the handset.
12 Save these instructions.
Use of a music source
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers, or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are
transmitted through the music-on-hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication
system.
Nortel hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Safety
Business Communications Manager (BCM) equipment meets all applicable requirements of both
the CSA C22.2 No.60950 and UL 60950 Edition 3.
Danger: Risk of shock.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Ensure the BCM system is not powered and that all telephone/data cables are removed
prior to opening the BCM unit in the field.
If installation of additional hardware and /or servicing is required, disconnect all telephone
cable connections prior to unplugging the BCM modules.
Ensure the BCM system is connected to a wall outlet with a third-wire protective earth
connection prior to connecting any telecommunications cables to the BCM main unit or
expansion units.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regulatory information 21
Caution: Only qualified persons should service the system.
The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel
having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they
are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or
other persons.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible
with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM system
must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire ground.
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming
available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines.
These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground through the power
cord. Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and
removed last when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be
powered down must have the network connections (central office lines) removed first.
Enhanced 911 configuration
Warning:
Local, state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer
Premises Equipment vary. Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding
compliance with applicable laws and regulations.
Radio-frequency interference
Warning: Equipment generates RF energy.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If not installed
and used in accordance with the installation manual, it may cause interference to radio
communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES.003, CLASS A
Canadian EMI Requirements. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause interference, in which case the user, at his or her own expense, will be required to
take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Telecommunication registration
BCM equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS-03 and US Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada
332D-5980A and FCC US: AB6KF15B20705 (key system), US: AB6MF15B20706 (hybrid
system), and US: AB6PF15B23740 (PBX system). Connection of the BCM telephone system to
the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack
that you can order from your local telecommunications company. This type of customer-provided
equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Regulatory information
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance facility designated
by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect
the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections
of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician.
International regulatory information
The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following:
This device conforms to Directive 1999/5/EC on Radio Equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European
Parliament And Of The Council.
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Hereby, Nortel declares that BCM units, with Model No. NT9T61XX, NT9T62XX, NT9T64XX,
and NT9T65XX, are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel reserves the right to make changes in
design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This equipment
has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC
requirements EN 55022 (Class A) and EN 55024. These EMC limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial and light industrial environment.
Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. The
above warning is inserted for regulatory reasons. If any customer believes that they have
an interference problem, either because their Nortel product seems to cause interference
or suffers from interference, they should contact their distributor immediately. The
distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and, if necessary, will have full
support from Nortel.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regulatory information 23
Safety
Warning:
Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment. The instructions in this
manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only.
Warning: Risk of shock.
Ensure the BCM is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network
cables are unplugged before opening the BCM main unit or expansion unit.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully
Warning: Only qualified persons should service the system.
The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service
personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards
to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger
to themselves or other persons.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are
possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM
system must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire Earth.
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming
available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines.
These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth through the power cord.
Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and
removed last when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be
powered down must have the network connections (exchange lines) removed first.
Additional safety information
The following interfaces (TNV) can be connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network in
accordance with Nortel and the local carriers installation requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BCM, CSC GATi Ports
BCM, CSC ADSL Port option
Expansion Unit, Digital Trunk Module (T1/E1/ISDN)
Expansion Unit, Global Analog Trunk Module 4 and 8 Port (Loop Start)
Expansion Unit, CTM4/8 (Loop Start)
Expansion Unit, 4x16 (Loop Start)
Expansion Unit, BRIM (ST configuration)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Regulatory information
The following interfaces are designated as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and cannot be
connected to unprotected plant wiring.
•
•
•
•
•
•
BCM, CSC Page Port
BCM, CSC Auxiliary Ringer Port
BCM, CSC Music On-Hold Port.
BCM, CSC Relay Port
BCM, CSC USB Port
BCM, CSC Ethernet Port including optional Ethernet Hub Ports
ITU standardization compliance
The following list provides voice/data applications and telephony support for BCM 4.0:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
G.711 and G.729AB codecs
V.27ter, V.29, and V.17 data modem modulation supported (T.38 fax control gateway)
G3 fax
T512.1 (Type 1 Receiver DTMF)
G.168
H.323
Q.931
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Chapter 1
Getting started
About this guide
The BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide describes how to install, configure, and
maintain the BCM200 and BCM400 hardware running Business Communications Manager
(BCM) 4.0 software.
The concepts, operations, and tasks described in this guide relate to the hardware of the BCM
system. This guide provides task-based information on how to install the hardware components
and perform basic configuration tasks.
Use Element Manager, Startup Profile, and Telset Administration to configure various BCM
parameters.
In brief, the information in this guide explains:
•
•
•
•
Installing hardware components
Starting and initializing the system hardware
Replacing components
Testing the system
Audience
The BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide is directed to installers responsible for
installing, configuring, and maintaining BCM 4.0 systems.
To use this guide, you must:
•
•
•
be an authorized BCM 4.0 installer or administrator within your organization
know basic Nortel BCM terminology
be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology
Acronyms
The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide.
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 1 of 3)
Acronym
Description
ACU
AIS
Audio conference unit
Alarm indication system
American Power Conversion
APC
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 Chapter 1 Getting started
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 2 of 3)
Acronym
Description
ASM
ATA
Analog station module (analog station media bay module)
Analog terminal adapter
BCM
BRIM
CAP
CFA
CLID
CO
Business Communications Manager
Basic rate interface module (basic rate interface media bay module)
Central answering position
Carrier failure alarm
Calling line identification
Central office
CSU
CTM
DDIM
DIMM
DMC
DSM
DSP
DSU
DTE
DTM
FEM
FRU
GASM
GATM
KEM
KIM
Channel service unit
Caller ID trunk module (caller ID trunk media bay module)
Digital drop and insert MUX
Dual in-line memory module
Digital mobility controller
Digital station module (digital station media bay module)
Digital signal processor
Data service unit
Data terminal equipment
Digital trunk module (digital trunk media bay module)
Fiber expansion module
Field replaceable unit
Global analog station module (global analog station media bay module)
Global analog trunk module (global analog trunk media bay module)
Key expansion module
Key indicator module
KRS
LAN
Keycode retrieval system (Nortel keycode retrieval system)
Local area network
LIU
Line isolation unit
MBM
MSC
MWI
NIC
Media bay module
Media services card
Message waiting indication
Network interface card
ONS
OSI
on-premise station
Open switch interval
PCI
Peripheral component interface
Processor expansion card
PEC
PSTN
PSU
Public switched telephone network
Power supply unit
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Getting started 27
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 3 of 3)
Acronym
Description
QoS
Quality of service
RAI
Remote alarm indication
Redundant array of independent disks
Ringer equivalence number
Redundant feature option
Redundant power supply
Station auxiliary power supply
Safety extra low voltage
System status display
RAID
REN
RFO
RPS
SAPS
SELV
SSD
UPS
USB
VMWI
VOIP
WAN
Uninterruptable power supply
Universal serial bus
Visual message waiting indicator
Voice over Internet protocol
Wide area network
Symbols and conventions used in this guide
These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCM system.
Caution: Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment.
Danger: Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock.
Warning: Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work
improperly.
Note: Alerts you to important information.
Tip: Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 Chapter 1 Getting started
Security Note: Indicates a point of system security where a default should be
changed, or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of
!
security required for the system.
Warning: Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap
before performing the maintenance procedure.
Warning: Alerts you to remove the BCM main unit and expansion unit power
cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance procedure.
These conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display and
dialpad.
Convention
Example
Used for
Word in a special font (shown in
the top line of the display)
Command line prompts on display telephones.
Pswd:
Underlined word in capital letters
(shown in the bottom line of a
two-line display telephone)
Display option. Available on two-line display
telephones. Press the button directly below the
option on the display to proceed.
PLAY
Dialpad buttons
Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a
particular option.
£
These text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described:
Convention
Description
bold Courier
text
Indicates command names and options and text that you must enter.
Example: Use the infocommand.
Example: Enter show ip{alerts|routes}.
italic text
Indicates book titles.
plain Courier
text
Indicates command syntax and system output (for example, prompts
and system messages).
Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters
FEATURE
HOLD
RELEASE
Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on
whichever set you are using.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Getting started 29
Related publications
This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide. There are two types
Technical Documents
System Installation
Upgrade Guide (N0060597)
BCM 4.0 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide (N0060602)
BCM1000 BCM 3.7 Installation and Maintenance Guide (N0008587 01)
BCM 4.0 for BCM1000 Installation and Maintenance Guide Addendum (N0060603)
Keycode Installation Guide (N0060625)
System Programming
BCM 4.0 Administration Guide (N0060598)
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide (N0060600)
BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide (N0060606)
BCM 4.0 Telset Administration Guide (N0060610)
Telephones and Peripherals
BCM 4.0 Telephony Device Installation Guide (N0060609)
Digital Mobility
Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide (N0000623)
T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide (P0606142)
IP Telephony
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide (N0060634)
Call Pilot
CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide (N0027247)
CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide (N0060618)
User Guides
There are no references to specific user guides.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 Chapter 1 Getting started
How to get help
This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
Getting Help from the Nortel Web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support
Web site:
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues
with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to:
•
•
download software, documentation, and product bulletins
search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to
technical issues
•
•
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment
open and manage technical support cases
Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you don’t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site, and have a
Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region:
Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express Routing Code (ERC)
to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the ERC for
your product or service, go to:
Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized
reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Chapter 2
Introducing the BCM hardware
The Nortel Business Communications Manager (BCM) system provides private network and
telephony management capability to small and medium-sized businesses. The BCM system
integrates voice and data capabilities, voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) gateway functions, and
quality of service (QoS) data-routing features into a single telephony system. The BCM system is
a compact system that enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a
business environment.
Refer to the following sections for information on the BCM hardware components:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note: Some of the components described in this document are not available in all areas.
Ask your Nortel sales agent for information about availability.
Main units
The primary hardware component in the BCM system is the main unit:
•
•
Warning: External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer, page relay, page
output, and music-on-hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage (SELV).
All four interfaces are SELV, and the external equipment connected to these
interfaces must be SELV. If these interfaces are not SELV, you must use external
line isolation units (LIU).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
BCM200 main unit
Figure 1 BCM200 main unit components
Base function tray
MBM bays
MBM
ejectors
Tray latch
Tray latch
Table 1 BCM200 main unit component descriptions
Component
Description
Base function tray
The sliding base function tray provides call processing functions and interface
Tray latch
The tray latch enables you to remove the base function tray.
Media bay module (MBM)
bays
The MBM bay is a slot into which you install an MBM. The BCM200 main unit has two
MBM ejectors
The MBM ejector enables you to remove an MBM from the MBM bay.
internal components.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 33
Figure 2 BCM200 main unit internal components
Fan
Removable cover
Front view
Hard disk
I/O card
Power supply
MBM backplane
MBM backplane
connectors
Rear view
Power supply bay
Fan exhaust
Hard disk bay (removable panel)
Rack-mount adapter
anchor points
Table 2 BCM200 main unit internal component descriptions
Component
Description
Hard disk
The programmed hard disk (or field redundancy upgrade) provides an additional hard
Power supply
Cooling fan
The auto-sensing power supply (standard) provides power to the main unit (see “BCM
The system cooling fan forces warm air out of the main unit (see “Cooling fan” on
page 68).
I/O card
The I/O interface card provides a signal junction between the base function tray, hard
MBM backplane
Removable cover
The MBM backplane provides the MBM component interface to the power supply and
The removable cover provides access to internal components.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
BCM400 main unit
The BCM400 main unit is available either in a standard or redundant feature option (RFO)
configuration.
These components are the same for the standard and RFO configurations.
Figure 3 BCM400 main unit components
Advanced function tray
Tray latch
Primary Mirror
Alarm Reset
MBM bays
Status
Tray latch
Base function tray
MBM ejector
Table 3 BCM400 main unit component descriptions
Component
Description
Base function tray
The sliding base function tray provides call processing functions and interface
Advanced function tray
Tray latch
The sliding advanced function tray contains a hard disk and a bay for future use. See
The tray latch enables you to remove the base function tray or the advanced function
tray.
Media bay module (MBM)
bay
The MBM bay is a slot into which you install an MBM. See “Media bay modules
MBM ejector
The MBM ejector enables you to remove an MBM from the MBM bay.
components.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 35
Figure 4 BCM400 main unit internal components (standard configuration)
Front view
Removable cover
Power supply
Fan
Advanced
function tray
Base function
tray
MBM backplane
Rack-mount bracket
Rear view
MBM backplane
connectors
Fan access panel
Power supply
support bracket
mount
Fan exhaust
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 5 BCM400 main unit internal components (RFO configuration)
Removable cover
Front view
Power supply
Hard disks &
RAID
Fans
Advanced
function tray
Base function
tray
MBM backplane
Rack-mount bracket
Rear view
MBM backplane
connectors
Fan exhausts
Power supply
support bracket
mount
Fan access
panel
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 37
Table 4 BCM400 main unit internal component descriptions (standard and RFO configurations)
Component
Front view
Description
Removable cover
Power supply
The removable cover provides access to internal components.
Standard: The auto-sensing power supply (standard) provides power to the main unit
RFO: The two redundant, hot-swappable power supply modules provide power to the
Cooling fan
MBM backplane
The MBM backplane provides the MBM component interface to the power supply and
Rack-mount bracket
Hard disk and RAID
The rack-mount bracket is required to install the main unit in an equipment rack.
The two hard disks and RAID controller card.
Rear view
MBM backplane connector
Fan access panel
Fan exhausts
The MBM backplane connector connects to the MSC and power supply.
The fan access panel provides access to the fans for maintenance purposes.
The fan exhausts allow the fans to move warm air outside the main unit.
Power supply support bracket The power supply support bracket stabilizes the power supply when mounted in the
mount main unit.
BCM400 advanced function tray
The advanced function tray houses the hard disk assembly and an extra, unpopulated bay. The
standard configuration contains a single hard disk and has no redundant array of independent disks
(RAID) LED display.
The advanced function tray in the RFO configuration contains two hard disks and a RAID
controller card, and has an LED display to monitor RAID status. The extra, unpopulated bay is
reserved for future development. The advanced function tray mounts in the upper BCM400 main
unit bay. The advanced function tray slides out and away from the front of the main unit for hard
disk maintenance, RAID upgrade, or exchange purposes.
Figure 6 illustrates the advanced function tray and faceplate interfaces for the BCM400 standard
and RFO configurations.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 6 Advanced function tray
Hard disk
Advanced function
tray latch
Hard disk cage
Advanced function
tray chassis
Status LEDs
(RAID only)
Buzzer reset button
(RAID only)
Bezel screw
Reserved bay
Advanced function tray RAID configuration
Advanced function tray face with single hard disk
Hard disk cage
Hard disk
Power supply
Primary disk
connector
Reserved bay
Power supply
connector
RAID
card
Mirror
disk
Hard disk
cage lift tab
IDE connector
IDE connector
BCM400 advanced function tray RAID status LEDs
show the current state of redundant array of independent disks (RAID) hardware components.
The RAID status LEDs indicate monitoring of the following:
•
•
•
Primary hard disk activity
Mirror hard disk activity
RAID card status activity
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 39
Figure 7 Advanced function tray RAID status LEDs
Alarm Reset
Primary Mirror
Status
Base function tray component hardware
This section describes the following base function tray components:
•
•
•
•
•
Base function tray faceplate components
components.
Figure 8 Base function tray faceplate components
System status LEDs
Reset button
WAN card
MSC
USB port
Modem port
COM port
(serial port)
Ethernet
port 1
Ethernet
port 2
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Table 5 Base function tray faceplate component descriptions
Component
Description
System status LEDs
The system status display LEDs indicate the current status of the hardware
Reset button
WAN card
The reset button restarts the BCM system.
The WAN card (field upgrade) connects the BCM system to the wide area network
Media services card (MSC)
The MSC performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for
USB (universal serial bus)
port
The two USB ports connect USB-compatible peripherals to the BCM system.
Modem port
The modem port provides PSTN dial-up access to the BCM system.
COM port (or serial port)
The COM port provides a serial connection to a laptop for maintenance purposes.
Ethernet port 2
Ethernet port 1
Ethernet port 2 provides access to the internal local area network.
Ethernet port 1 provides access to the external local area network.
Base function tray internal components
The base function tray installs in the main unit and houses the main card with the system
interfaces.
describes the internal components.
Figure 9 Base function tray internal components
DS256 interface
MSC mounting
screws
System status LEDs
PEC III
slots
MSC
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 41
Table 6 Base function tray internal component descriptions
Component
Description
System status LEDs
The system status display LEDs indicate the current status of the hardware
DS256 interface
The DS256 interface connects to MBM backplane DS30 connectors.
The PEC III slots provide connections for installing PECs.
PEC III slots
Media services card (MSC)
The MSC performs call processing and media processing of the voice channels for
MSC mounting screws
These screws are used to mount the MSC in the main unit.
Media services card (MSC)
The media services card (MSC) is a peripheral component interface (PCI) card that performs call
processing and media processing of the voice channels for the BCM system, including VoIP
trunks. The MSC also offers connections for auxiliary features, including external
customer-supplied hardware for paging and music-on-hold.
Figure 10 BCM200 MSC components
Mounting
screw
holes
PEC III (2 slots)
DS256 interface (connect
to MBM backplane DS30
connectors)
PCI connector
Bracket press plate
Auxiliary ringer
Page relay
Page output
Lanclet tab
Music-on-hold input
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 11 BCM400 MSC components
Mounting
screw
holes
PEC III (4 slots)
DS256 interface (connect
to MBM backplane DS30
connectors)
PCI connector
Bracket press plate
DS256 (to expansion unit)
Auxiliary ringer
Lanclet tab
Page relay
Page output
Music-on-hold input
Table 7 MSC faceplate optional connectors
Connectors
Description
DS256 connector (BCM400) The BCM expansion unit connects to the BCM main unit through the DS256 jack on
the MSC faceplate. The DS256 cable to make this connection is provided with the
purchase of a BCM expansion unit.
Auxiliary ringer jack
The BCM system uses the auxiliary ringer jack to control the cadence of an auxiliary
ringer (customer supplied). You must use this output in a low current, low voltage
application only. Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly.
Page relay jack
When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier,
you also use the page relay jack. The page relay jack connects a floating relay
contact pair. The BCM system uses this jack to control the external paging amplifier.
Page output jack
The BCM system uses the page output to connect an internally generated voice
paging signal to an external paging amplifier (customer supplied).
Music-on-hold jack
The BCM system uses the music-on-hold input to connect an external music source
that supplies a signal to held lines (music-on-hold) or telephone speakers
(background music). The input source can be any available radio or music source
approved for connection to the network.
For directions on setting up these features, refer to “Installing optional telephony equipment” on page 173.
Warning: External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output,
and music-on-hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage (SELV). All four
interfaces are (SELV) and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be
SELV. If these interfaces are not SELV, you must use external line isolation units (LIU).
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 43
MSC IP call processing hardware
If your system requires a high volume of IP telephones or more IP trunks than the standard eight
trunks, you can switch a DS30 bus setting on the MSC from providing service for an MBM, to
providing digital processing service for additional IP telephones and trunks. To ensure adequate
data flow from the system, you can increase the number of PEC III cards (BCM200 can have
maximum of two cards; BCM400 can have a maximum of four).
•
DS30 buses: DS30 buses contain internal communication paths. Each DS30 bus provides up
to 32 signaling channels and 32 media channels.
— Two DS30 buses are exclusively dedicated to MSC data resources. Five paths within these
buses have hard-coded applications. The other paths can be assigned to various data
applications, such as voice mail, dialup ISDN WAN, VoIP trunks, or IP telephony.
— Five DS30 buses are exclusively reserved for the MBMs.
— One DS30 bus can be switched to accommodate MBMs or more channels for IP
telephones or VoIP trunks. You control the use of this bus by using either a 2/6 or 3/5
DS30 bus split. This is set when you configure the system.
•
PEC IIIs: PEC IIIs increase the digital signal processing capacity for voice mail, call center,
fax, VoIP trunks, IP telephony, and dial-up ISDN WAN features. The BCM200 system uses
one PEC III card (expandable to two). The BCM400 system uses two PEC IIIs (expandable to
four) to accommodate increased requirements for media processing.
Main card
The main card contains several field replaceable units (FRUs), such as the RAM, modem card, and
CMOS battery. A riser card, set at right angles to the main card, provides connections for the MSC
as installed in the base function tray.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 12 Main card connectors (installed in the base function tray)
PCI riser card
connectors
Modem
card
DIMM
connectors
CMOS
battery
I/O card
connector
Main card
Main card connections
The main card provides peripheral and telephony processing control for the BCM system. The
main card connects to the I/O card, system status display (SSD) card, and modem interface card.
Figure 13 shows the main card and I/O card connectors.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 45
Figure 13 Card connections
Front
Rear
DIMM connectors
SSD board
connector
Connect to HDD for BCM400
Connect to
redundant
fan
SSD connector
Modem card
Connect to
single fan
I/O Card
Connect to
power supply
(20 pin)
Main card
Modem card
connector
Connect to
redundant power
supply status
Connect to
HDD for
BCM200
Connect to
power supply
(PSU AUX)
Main card
and I/O card
connector
Lower PCI riser
connection to MSC
Upper PCI riser
connection to
WAN card
PCI riser card
The peripheral component interface (PCI) riser card extends upward, and at a right angle, from the
main card. The PCI riser card provides a PCI for the MSC and field-installed WAN cards. Figure
14 shows the PCI riser card installed in the base function tray.
Figure 15 shows the PCI connectors without the MSC or WAN cards. Two screws at the top of the
PCI riser card attach the card to the side of the base function tray.
Figure 14 PCI riser card (installed in base function tray)
WAN card
(field installable)
WAN daughter cards
PCI riser card
MSC
WAN PCI connector
MSC PCI connector
Main card/PCI riser
card connector
Main card
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 15 PCI riser card connectors
PCI riser card mounting screws
Base
function
tray - front
WAN PCI connector
MSC PCI connector
PCI riser card
PCI riser/main card connector
Main card
Data networking components
The data networking components connect the BCM system to the WAN.
WAN interface card
The network interface card (NIC) uses a T1 interface and sync port that connects the BCM system
to the WAN. The WAN card is available as a field replaceable unit. For further information on
The international WAN card version (Europe, Middle East, Africa [EMEA]) connects to a
The dual V.35 WAN card version connects to channelized T1 TDM circuits using two V.35
The North American WAN card version connects to a channelized T1 TDM circuit with an
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 47
Figure 16 WAN interface card (international version)
Daughter cards
WAN card
PCI clamp
press plate
PCI connector
X.21 DB25 female
connector (WAN1)
V.35 DB25 female connector (WAN2)
Figure 17 Dual V.35 WAN interface card
Daughter cards
WAN card
PCI clamp
press plate
PCI connector
V.35 DB25 female connector (WAN1)
V.35 DB25 female connector (WAN2)
Figure 18 WAN interface card (North American version)
Daughter cards
WAN card
PCI clamp
press plate
PCI connector
T1 CSU connector (WAN1)
V.35 DB25 female connector (WAN2)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Modem card
The V.92 (or V.90) modem connects the BCM system to the public switched telephone network
(PSTN), enabling the BCM system to send and receive data. The modem card is standard on North
American systems, while it is optional for APAC and EMEA. The modem kit consists of a modem
card, RJ-11 interface, and connector cable. For further information on installation and removal, see
Figure 19 shows the modem components.
Use the modem connection to:
•
•
manage the BCM system from a different location
provide dial-up backup for a WAN card
Figure 19 Modem card and interface
Modem card
RJ-11 card interface
To main card modem
socket connector
RJ-11 connector
(exposed on base
function tray face)
Modem card
pin guide
2-pin connector
Main card connector
Base function tray
mount points
I/O interface card
The I/O interface card provides a signal junction between the base function tray, hard disk, power
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 49
Figure 20 I/O interface card connectors
PSU status - RPS output
signalling connector
BCM200 MSC guide bracket
Fan 2 connector
Fan 1 connector
Primary IDE
controller (IDE0)
20-pin power
supply connector
I/O Card
Base function
tray connector
PSU AUX connector
Secondary IDE
controller (IDE1)
BCM expansion unit (BCM400 only)
In addition to a main unit, the BCM400 system can have one expansion unit. The expansion unit is
not compatible with the BCM200 system. The BCM expansion unit contains six additional bays
for MBMs.
The supplied DS256 cable is 5 m (16 ft.) long and connects into a DS256 port on the MSC of the
information on installing a expansion unit.
Note: The number of MBMs that you can install is determined by the number of DS30
buses required by the MBMs and the number of buses available.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 21 BCM expansion unit connected to BCM400 main unit
BCM400 main unit
DS256 port
BCM expansion unit
NEEd
DS256 port
MBM bays and backplane
The number and configuration of the MBMs depend on the number of bays available in the main
unit and DS30 system resources. The BCM200 main unit provides two MBM bays. The BCM400
main unit provides four MBM bays.
All MBM bays must contain either an MBM or an MBM filler blanking plate. Fill unpopulated
Figure 22 MBM filler blanking plate
Fillerblankingplate
face
Locking clip
The MBMs slide into the MBM bays and lock into place. Pull on the MBM ejector to release the
MBM or filler blanking plate. The MBM or filler blanking plate partially ejects from the bay. Slide
the MBM out of the bay to remove it from the main unit.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 51
The MBM backplane provides the MBM component interface to the power supply and main card.
The MBM backplane mounts at the rear of the MBM bays and is a non-replaceable component.
Figure 23 illustrates the BCM200 MBM backplane and connectors.
Figure 23 BCM200 MBM backplane
Front view
Rear view
MBM backplane
connector to MSC
MBM backplane
connectors
MBM backplane
connector to power
supply
Figure 24 illustrates the BCM400 MBM backplane and connectors.
Figure 24 BCM400 MBM backplane
Front view
Rear view
MBM backplane
connector to MSC
MBM backplane
connector to power
supply
MBM backplane
connectors
Media bay modules (MBMs)
The BCM system is modular. You can increase the capacity of the system by adding more media
bay modules (MBMs). Each BCM allocates a maximum of six DS30 buses to the MBMs. The
number of MBMs that can be added to your system is determined by the number of media bays
that are open, combined with the number of DS30 buses each component uses.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
If your system requires many IP lines or trunks, you can reduce the number of DS30 buses that are
assigned to MBMs and increase the number of buses available to IP telephones. This is known as a
3/5 DS30 bus split. In this case, you only have five DS30 buses available for use by the MBMs.
Warning: Changing the DS30 bus split
If you change the bus split from 2/6 (default) to 3/5 after the system is initialized, any
module set to DS30 bus 7 or requiring the use of bus 7 becomes inoperable.
If you change the bus split from a 3/5 split to a 2/6 split after the system is initialized, all
data is lost and all optional applications must be reinstalled and reconfigured.
Figure 25 Telephony hardware components
CTM
4
1
Aux
2
3
4
DSM 16+
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PowerStatus
combinations” on page 352 to determine which MBMs
and which types of trunk lines are available in your
location.
The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and
extensions. Install the MBMs in the MBM bays in the BCM200 or BCM400 main units and the
BCM expansion unit.
MBMs have LEDs on the faceplate. For information on MBM LEDs, see “Viewing the BCM
MBMs and which types of trunk lines are available in your location.
The back of the MBM has a single connector that provides signaling channels, media channels,
and power to the MBM. This connector plugs into the MBM backplane in the main unit or
expansion unit. Some MBMs also have a cooling fan that runs off the MBM power source. Figure
26 shows the rear views of the two types of MBMs.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 53
Figure 26 MBM connectors (rear view)
Cooling fan
Signaling, media, and
power connector
Signaling, media, and
power connector
This section provides information on the following telephony MBMs:
•
•
•
Trunk media bay modules (MBMs)
You install the trunk MBMs in the BCM main unit or the BCM expansion unit. Trunk MBMs
connect telecommunications lines to the BCM system.
The type of MBM you install is determined by:
•
•
•
which lines are available from your telephone service provider
what lines you require for the types of telephones you want to use
budget considerations
Table 8 lists the types of trunk MBMs that are available for the BCM system.
Table 8 Trunk MBMs (Sheet 1 of 2)
MBM
What it does
Special notes
DTM
Connects digital public switched
telephone lines to the BCM system.
Install in the BCM main unit only.
DTMs do not function if installed in the
BCM expansion unit.
CTM4/CTM8
Connects a maximum of four (CTM4) or
eight (CTM8) analog public switched
telephone lines to the BCM system.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Table 8 Trunk MBMs (Sheet 2 of 2)
MBM
What it does
Special notes
ISDN BRI
Connects a maximum of four ISDN BRI
S/T interfaces.
GATM4/GATM8
Connects either four (GATM4) or eight
(GATM8) analog public switched
telephone lines to the BCM system.
Digital trunk media bay module
The digital trunk media bay module (DTM) connects to a standard digital PSTN T1/fT1, E1/fE1,
or PRI ISDN line using either a digital or PRI line. The DTM also supports DASS2, DPN22,
Q.SIG, and MCDN over ISDN:
•
On North American BCM systems, the DTM connects a T1 or PRI circuit to the BCM system;
T1 circuits provide 24 digital channels to the PSTN, while PRI circuits provide 23 digital
channels to the PSTN.
•
On International BCM systems, the DTM connects an ETSI ISDN (E1) or PRI (EI) circuit to
the BCM system, providing a maximum of 30 digital channels to the PSTN.
Warning: Install DTMs in the BCM main unit only. DTMs do not function if
installed in the BCM expansion unit.
If there are no empty MBM bays in the BCM main unit, move MBMs to the
expansion unit to provide space for the DTMs.
The front bezel of the DTM has an RJ-48C connector that connects the DTM to the service
provider connection point. The faceplate also has a set of monitor jacks you can use to monitor the
span.
There are six additional LEDs on the front of the DTM. For information about these additional
Figure 27 shows the DTM module interfaces.
Figure 27 DTM faceplate
Monitor jacks
RJ-48C digital
telephone line
connector
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 55
Tip: You can install a maximum of three DTM modules in the BCM main unit, depending
on the available buses.
Caller ID trunk media bay module
There are two Caller ID trunk media bay modules (CTM):
•
CTM4
The CTM4 connects a maximum of four analog calling line ID (CLID) interfaces to the BCM
system through four RJ-11 jacks on the MBM faceplate. These jacks are labeled Line 1,
Auxiliary, Line 2, Line 3, and Line 4. The auxiliary jack connects to Line 1.
•
CTM8
The CTM8 provides eight analog CLID interfaces to the BCM system through eight RJ-11
jacks on the MBM faceplate. Each jack also supports disconnect supervision. There are two
auxiliary jacks on this MBM which connect to Line 1 and Line 5.
The auxiliary ports enable you to connect to a V.92 or V.90 modem, fax machine, or analog
telephone. When the auxiliary device is active, the BCM system disables the associated line.
Conversely, when the line is active, the auxiliary port line is disabled. When you connect an
analog telephone to the auxiliary port, you can use it as an emergency telephone because this line
remains active during a power outage.
Figure 28 shows the front of the CTM4 and CTM8.
Figure 28 CTM4 and CTM8 module faceplate LEDS and connectors
Front View
CTM 4
8
7
6
Aux
5
CTM 8
1
Aux
2
3
4
1
Aux
2
3
4
CTM4
Power LED
Status LED
Line 1
Aux
Line 2
Line 1
Auxiliary port
Line 3
Line 4
CTM8
Auxiliary port
Line 5
Basic rate interface media bay module
The basic rate interface media bay module (BRIM) connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN loops
to the BCM system. The BRIM only recognizes the T-interface used in European networks. To use
the BRIM with the U-interface, typical in North American networks, you require an external NT1
box to convert the U-interface to a T-interface.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Each BRI ISDN loop you connect adds two telephone lines to the BCM system. Therefore, each
BRIM adds a maximum of eight lines to the BCM system through the four RJ-48C jacks on the
faceplate. The LEDs beside each RJ-48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active. Figure 29 on
page 56 shows the BRIM faceplate LEDs and connections.
Figure 29 BRIM faceplate
Global analog trunk media bay module
The global analog trunk media bay module (GATM) provides an interface for four or eight analog
public switched telephone network (PSTN) lines. The GATM supports both pulse and tone
dialing, as well as caller ID and disconnect supervision in selected markets throughout the world.
LEDs and RJ-21 connector. The GATM is available either in four-port (GATM4) or eight-port
(GATM8) configurations.
Figure 30 GATM faceplate
Station media bay modules (MBMs)
Station (MBM) connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the BCM system.
Table 9 lists the available station MBMs.
Table 9 Station MBMs (Sheet 1 of 2)
MBM
What it does
Special notes
DSM16(+)/DSM32(+)
Connects a maximum of 16 (DSM16+) or
32 (DSM32+) digital telephones to the
BCM system.
4x16
Connects a maximum of four analog
public switched telephone lines to the
BCM system.
Combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16
58)
Also connects a maximum of 16 digital
telephones to the BCM system.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 57
Table 9 Station MBMs (Sheet 2 of 2)
MBM
What it does
Special notes
ASM/ASM8
Connects a maximum of eight analog
devices to the BCM system.
ASM8+/GASM
Connects a maximum of eight analog
devices to the BCM system.
The GASM provides the following
additional services: caller ID, pass
through, message waiting indication, and
disconnect supervision at the telephone.
The GASM also allows you to download
new firmware.
Digital station media bay module
The digital station media bay modules (DSM) support digital telephones on the BCM system. This
The DSMs have the following characteristics:
•
DSM16(+) — supports 16 digital telephones through one RJ-21 connector. Set the double
density switch to enable the DSM to carry 16 extensions over a half DS30 bus. If required,
install a second DSM16(+) and set the double density switch to occupy the second half of the
DS30 bus to expand the number of extensions to 32.
•
DSM32(+) — supports 32 digital telephones through two RJ-21 connectors. A DSM32(+)
operating in single-density mode occupies two DS30 buses. Set the double density switch to
enable the DSM to carry 32 extensions over a single DS30 bus.
Note: Devices that share a DS30 bus must be similar. Use two DSM16(+)
module in double density mode on a single DS30 bus. Do not mix a DSM16(+)
module with a DSM32(+) module over a single DS30 bus.
Figure 31 DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors
DSM 16(+)
DSM 32(+)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
4x16 media bay module
The 4x16 media bay module (MBM) provides both analog trunk connections and connections to
digital telephones. The 4x16 MBM provides connections for four analog trunk lines and 16 digital
telephones. Each of the four analog trunk lines support caller ID and disconnect supervision. An
auxiliary port next to the Line 1 port enables you to use an analog telephony device, such as a
modem, fax, or telephone, to share the trunk.
Figure 32 shows the 4x16 MBM. The 4x16 MBM has one RJ-21 connector and five RJ-11
connectors on the faceplate.
Figure 32 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors
Analog station media bay modules
The analog station media bay modules (ASM, ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM8) can connect to a
maximum of eight analog telecommunication devices. These devices are standard analog
telephones, cordless telephones, fax machines, answering machines, or modems. The maximum
speed for a modem connection is 28.8 kbit/s.
In addition to ASM8 features, the ASM8+ and GASM8 offer the following features:
•
Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI) — LED indicates to the end user that a message is
waiting.
•
Disconnect supervision (Open Switch Interval [OSI] as per EIA/TIA 464) — indicates to the
attached device, in an established communication, that the connected device should release the
call (see disconnect supervision note).
•
•
•
Caller ID — provides the name, phone number, and other information about the caller to the
end user at the start of the call.
Firmware downloading capability — allows the system to upgrade the ASM8+ and GASM8
firmware at customer sites.
Enhanced ringing capability — ASM8+ and GASM8 provide a ringing voltage of 2 REN/65 V
rms per port.
•
•
Calling line identification (CLID)
The GASM8 is designated as an ONS (on-premise station) port.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 59
Disconnect supervision note: The central office disconnects the call after the
ASM8+ provides an open switch interval (OSI) to the off-hook station of 850 ms
(TIA/EIA 464 section 5.4.10.2.4; minimum is 600 ms) as a disconnect signal. If
the station remains on-hook after the disconnect signal, the ASM8+ disconnects
the station equipment from the network without returning a tone to it (TIA/EIA
464 section 5.4.10.2.5[1]). After the station equipment goes on-hook, the ASM8+
station interface is restored to on-hook (idle).
It is important to ensure that the device, application, or interface card connected to
an ASM8+ station interface conform to these on-hook and off-hook conditions.
The ASM, ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM8 each have one RJ-21 connector on the faceplate. Figure
33 on page 59 shows the GASM8.
Figure 33 GASM8 faceplate LEDs and connectors
The ringer equivalency number (REN) per port for ASM8 is 1; the REN for ASM8+ and GASM8
is 2.
Note: The termination of the analog interface can consist of any combination of devices,
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed
the REN of the interface to which the device is connected.
Table 10 shows the specifications for ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM8, and global analog station
interface (GASI).
Table 10 ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications (Sheet 1 of 2)
Specification
ATA2
ASM8
ASM8+
GASM8
GASI
Ringing frequency
(North America)
20 Hz 1 Hz
20 Hz 1 Hz
20 Hz 1 Hz
20 Hz 1 Hz
20 Hz 1 Hz
Ringing frequency
(Europe)
25 Hz 1 Hz
25 Hz 1 Hz
25 Hz 1 Hz
25 Hz 1 Hz
25 Hz 1 Hz
Ringing voltage (North 80 V rms 10% 55 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10%
America)
Ringing voltage
(Europe)
75 V rms +/-
10%
N/A
65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10% 65 V rms 10%
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Table 10 ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications (Sheet 2 of 2)
Specification
ATA2
ASM8
ASM8+
GASM8
GASI
Loop current
20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum
-48 V dc 10% -48 V dc 10% -29 V dc 10% -48 V dc 10% -48 V dc 10%
Battery feed voltage
FIC code
OL13ABC
3
N/A
1
N/A
2
N/A
2
N/A
2
Ringer equivalency
number
ATA2 to BCM loop
135 ohms
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
resistance (cable only) (800 m of
0.5-mm wire or
2600 ft of 24
AWG wire)
Analog loop resistance 1300 ohms
250 ohms (1538 200 ohms (1231 200 ohms (1231 200 ohms (1231
m of 0.5-mm m of 0.5-mm m of 0.5-mm m of 0.5-mm
wire or 5000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of
24 AWG wire) 24 AWG wire) 24 AWG wire) 24 AWG wire)
on terminal side for
voice applications
(cable only)
(7200 m of
0.5-mm wire or
26000 ft of 24
AWG wire)
Analog loop resistance 200 ohms (1231 250 ohms (1538 200 ohms (1231 200 ohms (1231 200 ohms (1231
on terminal side for
data applications
(cable only)
m of 0.5-mm
m of 0.5-mm
m of 0.5-mm
m of 0.5-mm
m of 0.5-mm
wire or 4000 ft of wire or 5000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of wire or 4000 ft of
24 AWG wire)
24 AWG wire)
600 ohms
24 AWG wire)
600 ohms
24 AWG wire)
600 ohms
24 AWG wire)
600 ohms
Input impedance at tip 600 ohms
and ring
Return loss
> 20 dB for 200 > 20 dB for 200 > 20 dB for 200 > 20 dB for 200 > 20 dB for 200
to 3400 Hz
(when
to 3400 Hz
(when
to 3400 Hz
(when
to 3400 Hz
(when
to 3400 Hz
(when
terminated with terminated with terminated with terminated with terminated with
600 ohms)
600 ohms)
600 ohms)
600 ohms)
600 ohms)
Insertion loss on an
internal call
ATA2 to BCM
ATA2 to BCM
ATA2 to BCM
ATA2 to BCM
ATA2 to BCM
loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5 loss 3.0 dB 0.5
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
Insertion loss on an
external call
ATA2 to BCM
loss 2.2 dB +/-
ASM to BCM
loss 3.0 dB +/-
ASM to BCM
loss 3.0 dB +/-
ASM to BCM
loss 3.0 dB +/-
ASM to BCM
loss 3.0 dB +/-
1.0 dB; BCM to 1.0 dB; BCM to 1.0 dB; BCM to 1.0 dB; BCM to 1.0 dB; BCM to
ATA2 loss 0.5
dB 1.0 dB
ASM loss 0.5 dB ASM loss 0.5 dB ASM loss 0.5 dB ASM loss 0.5 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
1.0 dB
MWI type (see Note)
Stutter tone
Stutter tone
Stutter tone/
/ Voltage MWI
(CO: 120 V)
Stutter tone/
Reverse polarity/ Reverse polarity/
Voltage MWI
(CO: 120 V)
Stutter Tone/
Voltage MWI
(PBX: 90 V)
Disconnect
supervision types
N/A
N/A
OSI EIA/TIA 464 OSI EIA/TIA 464 N/A
section
section
4.5.10.2.4/
4.5.10.2.5.1
4.5.10.2.4/
4.5.10.2.5.1
Note: The MWI type depends on the country profile, and the MWI voltage shown is a maximum value.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 61
Specialized media bay modules (MBMs)
This section describes the MBMs that perform a specific job outside of the trunk and station MBM
Table 11 Specialized MBMs
Module type
What it does
Special notes
FEM
Connects a maximum of six Norstar expansion
units.
The switches on the FEM are used to
turn fiber ports on and off. The FEM
does not work correctly if you set these
switches using the rules used for other
MBMs.
(see “Fiber expansion
DDIM
Enables a BCM system to share its connection to a
universal T1 network with a LAN.
(see “Digital drop and
61)
Fiber expansion media bay module
The fiber expansion media bay module (FEM) connects a maximum of six Norstar MBMs to the
BCM system. These connections provide a quick way to upgrade a Norstar system to a BCM
system.
The front bezel of the FEM has six connectors. These connections are made using fiber cables
between the FEM module and the Norstar expansion unit.
Figure 34 shows the front of the FEM module. Each enabled port consumes one DS30 bus.
Figure 34 FEM faceplate LEDs and connectors
FEM
5
2
6
3
4
1
Port 4
Power LED
Status LED
Port 1
Port 5
Port 2
Port 6
Port 3
Front view
Digital drop and insert MUX
The digital drop and insert MUX media bay module (DDIM) enables a BCM system to share its
connection to a universal T1 network with a local area network (LAN) to provide a combination of
voice and data channels.
The DDIM:
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
•
•
provides the functionality of a DTM (T1 digital lines only)
splits the incoming T1 line so that some of the lines are used for voice traffic and some of the
lines are used for data traffic
•
provides either the channel service unit (CSU) or data service unit (DSU) functionality to
support connections to data terminal equipment (DTE), such as a router or a bridge
•
•
•
connects to network devices that support V.35 interfaces
provides end-to-end transparent bit service
supports loopbacks between the BCM system and the internal BCM components, and between
the BCM system and digital terminal equipment
Figure 35 shows the DDIM faceplate LEDs and connectors.
Figure 35 DDIM faceplate LEDs and connectors
Data module serial port
10101
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
DCD
DSR
TM
Power LED
Status LED
In Service LED
Loopback test LED
Continuity loopback
Receive LEDs
Loopback
RJ-48C digital telephone line
connector
Transmit LEDs
BCM400 expansion gateway
The BCM400 expansion gateway is available in standard and redundant configurations for
BCM400 systems only.
The BCM400 expansion gateway kit (North America only) consists of a BCM400 main unit and
enough VoIP gateway trunk authorization codes to enable 48 ports of VoIP trunks. The BCM400
expansion gateway, combined with the BCM400 host system, provides a maximum of 192 TDM
sets, instead of 160, while communicating to the PSTN through TDM trunks on the expansion
gateway. The VoIP trunks connect the two systems and allow the BCM400 expansion gateway to
The addition of a second BCM400 expansion gateway provides up to two T1 PSTN trunks. This
releases enough system resources on the host BCM400 main unit for the addition of 64 digital
telephones.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 63
Figure 36 BCM400 expansion gateway configuration
Pr M Ala
M
All stations are
connected to
the Host
Host:
BCM main unit
and
expansion unit
IP trunk
Two PSTN trunks
on expansion
gateway
BCM400expansion
gateway
Pr M Ala
M
PSTN
BCM components
Refer to the following sections for descriptions of the BCM components:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BCM power supply
The BCM200 main unit and the BCM400 main unit (standard) use a switched power supply.
Internal cabling routes to the I/O card, media bay backplane, and hard disk. External cabling
Figure 37 BCM200 and BCM400 (standard) power supply (rear view)
Rear view
On/off switch
AC power connector
Fan
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Figure 38 Standard power supply connectors
Connector Configuration for
Standard Sparkle Power Supply
New Lengths
Purpose and Notes
525mm
MBM Back plane
525mm
MBM Back plane for BCM400, not required for BCM200
500mm to first,
+50mm to next,
+100mm to last
(total 650mm)
tie wrapped
Hard disk cage, extra connectors to be tucked under the
hard disk
every 5cm
430mm to first
(right angle) ,
+150mm to
next (total
580mm)
Reserved for future use
480mm
480mm
I/O Card
I/O Card
BCM400 redundant power supply
The BCM400 redundant power supply (RPS) is available as a field replaceable unit (FRU) or as
part of the BCM400 RFO. The redundant power supply consists of two power supply modules and
and can be exchanged one at a time during power-on conditions.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 65
Figure 39 BCM400 redundant power supply and modules
Power supply module
removed from the redundant
power supply unit
Power supply module
inserted in the
redundant power
supply unit
Figure 40 BCM400 redundant power supply connectors
Connector Configuration for
Redundant Sparkle Power Supply
Cable Lengths and
Markings
Purpose and Notes
Route to Media bay backplane 1: Tie any slack at
the connector (behind the MBM).
550mm (P2)
550mm (P3)
Route to Media bay backplane 2: Tie any slack at
the connector (behind the MBM).
325mm to first
(P4), +50mm to
next (P5),
To hard disk: Tie any slack at the power supply.
Tuck any loose connectors under the hard disk
+100mm to last
(P6) (total 475mm)
340mm to first
(P7)(right angle) ,
+150mm to next
(P8) (total 490mm)
Unused. Tie to the center of the hard disk cage.
Route to the I/O card.
Route to the I/O card.
515mm (P1)
515mm (P9)
Route to the I/O card.
Unused
515mm (PA)
300mm (PB)
In addition, international (non-North American) users require a power supply adapter cord for
each main unit and expansion unit.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Power supply adapter cord (international users)
The power supply adapter cord is for international (non-North American) BCM users. It connects
to the power supply on one end and to the (C-14) BCM power bar on the other end.
You require one power supply adapter cord for each power supply you want to connect to the
power bar.
Uninterruptable power supply
An uninterruptable power supply (UPS) is an optional device that maintains continuous operation
during power interruption or failure conditions. The UPS provides power source monitoring and
battery backup activation so that critical BCM functionality is maintained.
In a power failure situation, the UPS provides sufficient time to either correct the problem or
activate a contingency plan to sustain services. The UPS is configured to perform a graceful
shutdown of the BCM 2 minutes before the UPS battery power is drained.
The BCM system supports American Power Conversion (APC) UPS devices that use a USB
control interface. These include the APC UPS-Smart family (for example, UPS-Smart 750,
UPS-Smart 1000) and UPS-Back family (for example, UPS-Back 500 ES, UPS-Back 350 ES).
The UPS control software enables the configuration of various operational settings.
Note: For the UPS to function correctly, connect the UPS before the BCM system
is powered up. If you connect a UPS to a running system, the UPS will not
function.
In BCM 4.0 the serial interface is not supported for UPS connectivity. Only the
USB interface supports UPS connectivity.
On BCM systems with more than one unit, the power supplies for all of the units must be
connected to a single UPS.
The UPS feature is supported in all markets (110~120V and 220~240V power standards).
Hard disk
The BCM200 main unit and the BCM400 main unit (standard) contain a single hard disk and hard
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 67
Figure 41 BCM200 main unit hard disk and bracket
Front view
Rear view
Hard disk bracket
Hard disk
Connector
Hard disk bracket lift tab
Figure 42 BCM400 main unit hard disk and bracket
Front view
Rear view
Hard disk bracket
Hard disk
Hard disk bracket lift tab
RAID upgrade kit
The BCM200 main unit and the BCM400 main unit (standard) can contain a redundant array of
independent disks (RAID). The RAID upgrade kits have a single hard disk (mirror) and RAID
controller card. Use your current hard disk (from the single disk system) as the primary hard disk.
When the RAID upgrade is installed, the data from the primary hard disk is written to the mirror
hard disk. The dual hard disk configuration provides one-fault tolerance capability.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
The RAID card has three ribbon cable connectors. The hard disk connectors are mounted on the
right and left sides of the RAID controller card. The third ribbon cable connection, mounted at the
Figure 43 RAID upgrade kit (BCM400 main unit standard installation shown)
Front view
Primary hard disk
RAID bracket
Mirror hard disk
Mirror hard disk ribbon
cable connector (primary
hard disk connector on
opposite side)
RAID controller card
RAID card
status LEDs
Reset button
Rear view
Note: Reverse RAID
bracket installation
for BCM200. Lift tab
is on opposite end.
Primary hard disk
RAID connector
Mirror hard disk
RAID connector
Primary hard disk
ribbon cable connector
IDE connector
Hard disk
bracket lift tab
Power supply
connectors
Cooling fan
The BCM200 main unit and BCM400 main unit (standard) have a single cooling fan, while the
connectors.
The cooling fan mounts in the back of the BCM200 main unit. The cooling fans mount on a
removable panel in the back of the BCM400 main unit.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 69
Figure 44 Cooling fan
Mount holes
I/O card fan
connector
Field replaceable units (FRU)
hardware. The tables provide references to the component description and installation procedures.
Note: The product engineering code can change over time; consult the catalog for
the latest information.
Table 12 Card field replaceable units
Component description
FRU description
Installation procedure
Modem card
Media services card
Media services PEC III
WAN interface card with CSU/V.35
(North America only)
Dual V.35 WAN interface card
WAN interface card with CSU/V.35/
X.21 (International only)
256MB memory module
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Table 13 Chassis field replaceable units
Component description
FRU description
Installation procedure
Base function tray
Wall-mount kit
N/A
BCM field redundancy upgrade kit
Table 14 Hard drive field replaceable units
Component description
FRU description
Installation procedure
BCM RAID upgrade kit
BCM replacement blank hard drive
Table 15 Power supply field replaceable units
Component description
FRU description
Installation procedure
BCM uninterruptable power supply
BCM400 redundant power supply
module (single)
Table 16 Cooling fan field replaceable units
Component description
FRU description
Installation procedure
BCM400 cooling fan (4-wire base
unit)
BCM expansion unit cooling fan
BCM200 cooling fan
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 71
Table 17 MBM
Component description
FRU description
Installation procedure
MBM bay filler blanking plate
DTM MBM
CTM4 CLID trunk MBM
CTM8 CLID MBM
BRI S/T MBM
DSM16(+) MBM
DSM32(+) MBM
4x16 MBM
ASM8+ MBM
GASM8 MBM
FEM MBM
DDIM MBM
GATM MBM
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
Telephones and adapters
The following telephones and devices can be used with the BCM system:
Digital Phone 7100 — one-line display, one memory button
without indicator.
Digital Phone 7000 (not shown) (International only) — four
memory buttons, without display or indicators.
Digital Phone 7208 — one-line display, eight memory buttons
with indicators.
Digital Phone 7316 — two-line display, three display
buttons, 16 memory buttons with indicators, eight
memory buttons without indicators. Supports a separate
mute key and a headset key under the dialpad.
Digital Phone 7316E — two-line display, three display
buttons, 16 memory buttons with indicators, eight
memory buttons without indicators. Handsfree, mute,
and headset buttons are located under the dialpad. The
default button assignment for the 7316E is different from
the 7316.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 73
Digital Phone 7316E + Key Indicator Module
(KIM) — all the features of the 7316E plus 24
extra memory buttons with indicators, per KIM.
Can be configured as an enhanced central
answering position (CAP) that supports line and
Hunt group appearances (the eKIMs), or as an
ordinary KIM that only supports memory button
programming (the OKIMs). Supports a maximum
of four eKIMs and up to nine OKIMS.
Digital Phone 7406 cordless telephone system — provides cordless mobility in a
small office environment. Each base station supports three telephones. Function is
based on the 7316 telephone. The base station connects to a DSM on the system.
Provides six memory buttons with indicators and a two-line display with three
display buttons.
For installation instructions, refer to the T7406 Cordless Telephone Installation
Guide.
ABC
JKL
DEF
MNO
WXYZ
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
GHI
PQRS
TUV
#
IP Phone 1120E (not shown) — The Nortel IP Phone 1120E
brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a
Local Area Network (LAN) through an Ethernet connection.
The IP Phone 1120E has a graphical, high-resolution LCD display,
backlit, with adjustable contrast. It also has four user defined feature
keys and four soft keys.
IP Phone 1140E — The Nortel IP Phone 1140E brings voice and
data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network
(LAN) through an Ethernet connection.
The IP Phone 1140E has a graphical, high-resolution LCD display, backlit, with adjustable
contrast. It also has six user defined feature keys and four soft keys.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
IP Phone 2001 (not shown) — connects through an IP link to the BCM system. It has a
single-line text display with a row of display keys on the second display line. The IP Phone 2001
can be used to call through any type of BCM line.
IP Phone 2002 (not shown) — connects through an IP link to the BCM system. It has a two-line
text display with a row of display keys on the third display line, and four memory keys with
indicators. The IP Phone 2002 can be used to call through any type of BCM line.
IP Phone 2004 — connects through an IP link to the BCM
system. It has a six-line text display with a row of display keys
on the eighth display line, and six memory keys with
indicators. The IP Phone 2004 can be used to call through any
type of BCM line.
IP Phone 2007 (not shown) — connects to a LAN through an
Ethernet connection. The IP Phone 2007 supports call
processing features, and can work with an External
Application Server to display web-based and interactive
applications on the large, color LCD touch screen.
i2050 software phone (not shown) — installs on a customer
PC to provide Voice over IP (VoIP) services using a telephony
server and your company’s local area network (LAN).
Nortel IP Audio Conferencing Unit (ACU) 2033 — provides audio
conferencing. The keypad provides many of the set features of the basic
Business Series telephones without display or memory buttons. The audio
conference phone comes with three microphones. Installation instructions
are provided with the audio conference phone.
Wireless LAN handsets 2210, 2211, and 2212 — Provides telephony access over the LAN or
WAN through an 802.11-compatible access point. An SVP server provides communication
between the handsets and the BCM IP functions. These handsets emulate the function of the IP
Phone 2004. They have a three-line truncated display, with display keys. There are no navigation
keys, so core-system features requiring navigation are not supported. There are no line keys, but
the telephone uses a line key menu on which lines, intercom keys, and button features can be
programmed.
Refer to the WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide for details.
Digital mobility system — Provides mobile coverage for your office. The handsets
communicate through a stationary base station, which is wired to a digital mobility controller
(DMC). In turn, the DMC is wired to a digital module on the BCM200 main unit, the BCM400
main unit, or the BCM expansion unit. Depending on the mobility configuration, you can have up
to 64 sets assigned to your system. These handsets have a two-line display with display keys that
allow user interaction with system prompts. Otherwise, their function emulates the 7100 digital
phones.
Refer to the Nortel Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide for details.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware 75
Note: Nortel provides limited support for legacy Norstar telephones.
Accessories
The following accessories can be used with the BCM system:
Station auxiliary power supply (SAPS) — provides power for the OKIMs when the 7316E is
connected to five or more KIMs. It can also be used to extend the loop length between a telephone
or terminal and the BCM system from 1000 to 2600 feet. You must use a dedicated cable to
connect the two locations.
Analog Terminal Adapter 2 (ATA2) — converts digital signals to analog signals to allow
communication with analog devices, such as fax machines, modems, and answering machines.
The ATA2 supports a maximum transmission rate of 28.8 kbit/s. With a single-line telephone, the
ATA2 supports a long-loop configuration.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM hardware
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs 77
Chapter 3
Viewing the BCM system LEDs
Refer to the following sections for information on the BCM system LEDs:
•
•
Base function tray system status display LEDs
A line of 10 LEDs displays on the base function tray faceplate of the BCM main unit (see Figure
Manager contains a monitoring tool that allows you to determine the current condition of the LEDs
from your computer.
Figure 45 BCM base function tray system status LEDs
Red or Green
WAN
LAN 1
Modem LAN 2 Temp Fan
Power
Disk Status MSC
Table 18 summarizes the possible operating states of the LEDs on the front of the base function
tray. The BCM expansion unit has both a power and a status LED, which provide the same
indicators as for the base function tray.
Table 18 Base function tray system status LED states (Sheet 1 of 3)
LED
Description
LED states
Power
Indicates the status of all power components.
Green ON – normal operation
The Power LED is used with the Status LED to show
Red ON – an excessive voltage deficiency or a
An LED that monitors a component will also show a component failure (such as a redundant power
fault in combination with the Power LED.
supply module)
Disk
Indicates access to the system hard disk.
Green ON – hard disk activity detected
This LED lights when the HDD is accessed. If the
systems does not need to read or write to the HDD
the LED is off.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs
Table 18 Base function tray system status LED states (Sheet 2 of 3)
LED
Description
LED states
Status
Indicates the system status.
Green ON – all monitored services are functioning
Six non-blinking LEDs in the center indicate
monitoring software is not active.
Green FLASH – failure in one or more telephony
services
Green OFF – not all services are working
MSC
WAN
PCI Device/MSC
Green ON – device is present and operating
properly
Green FLASH – driver is not running
Green OFF – device is defective or not present
PCI Device/WAN1 + WAN2
Green ON – device is present and operating
properly
Green FLASH – driver is not running
Green OFF – device is defective or not present
Modem PCI Device/Modem
Green ON – device is present and operating
properly
Green FLASH – driver is not running
Green OFF – device is defective or not present
LAN 1
LAN 2
PCI Device/LAN 1
PCI Device/LAN 2
Green ON – device is present and operating
properly
Green FLASH – driver is not running
Green OFF – device is defective or not present
Green ON – device is present and operating
properly
Green FLASH – driver is not running
Green OFF – device is defective or not present
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs 79
Table 18 Base function tray system status LED states (Sheet 3 of 3)
LED
Description
LED states
Temp
Monitors the main unit and CPU temperature.
Green ON – normal
Red ON – sensor is non-operational or temperature
is out of range.
Note: Red LED indicates a possible fan failure.
Fan
Monitors the status of the fans.
Green ON – all installed fans are working
Red ON – sensor failure or there is a problem with
at least one fan
During system startup, the power LED and the status LED indicate the status of the system.
Table 19 describes the various states of the Power and Status LEDs, and the corresponding alarm
conditions during system startup.
Table 19 Power and Status LED states and descriptions during system startup
Power LED
Status LED
Description
Solid Green
Solid Red
Solid Green
Solid Green
Off
Non alarm condition - Normal operation
Alarm condition - Normal operation
Alarm condition - Startup profile
LED state 5
Solid Green
Solid Red
Off
Alarm 10906: System Startup - Operating system and alarm subsystem
available
Solid Red
Blinking Green LED state 6
Alarm 10907: System Startup - Telephony and voice mail active
Blinking Green LED state 7
Alarm 10908: System Startup - Element Manager is available
LED state 8
Solid Green
Solid Green
Solid Green
Alarm 10909: System Startup - Startup complete. Service Manager and
Scheduling Services available
Media bay module LEDs
The two media bay module (MBM) LEDs show the power and status of the MBM. Figure 46
shows the location of the
(Power) and
(Status) LEDs on an MBM. The power and status
LEDs are located in the same place on all MBMs.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs
Figure 46 MBM LEDs
Power
Status
Table 20 describes the possible MBM LED states.
Table 20 MBM LED descriptions
Power
Status
Description
Off
Off
The MBM does not have power, or there is a failure of the MBM power
converter.
On
On
Off
BCM to expansion unit failure or system initialization.
Blinking
Hardware is working, but there is an operational problem such as:
•
•
•
•
•
no link to main unit is detected
frame alignment is lost on messages from the main unit
bandwidth not allocated
MBM is in maintenance state
MBM is in download state (GASM, GATM4/GATM8)
Blinking
On
Blinking
On
The MBM has power, but there is a hardware problem such as:
•
•
•
partial failure of power converter
thermal overload
fan failure
The MBM is ready to operate.
The following MBMs have additional LEDs:
•
•
DTM LEDs
the DTM LEDs.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs 81
Figure 47 DTM LEDs
Power LED
Status LED
In service LED
Loopback test LED
Receive LEDs
Transmit LEDs
Table 21 describes the functions of the DTM LEDs.
Table 21 DTM LED functions
LED
Status
Descriptions
Power
–
Status
–
In service
Flashing
The T1, ETSI, or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is
running or the DTM is initializing.
Loopback test
On
A continuity loopback test is running.
Receive alarm On
Receive error On
Transmit alarm On
A problem with the received digital transmission. This half-duplex link does
not work.
A small error as a result of degraded digital transmission. Possible causes are
an ohmic connection, water ingress, or too long a loop.
The DTM cannot transmit. The DTM sends an alarm indication signal (AIS) to
the terminating switch. This half-duplex link does not work.
Transmit error
All LEDs
On
The DTM is sending a remote alarm indication (RAI) carrier failure alarm
(CFA) to the terminating switch. If the transmit alarm is not on, this error
indicates a far-end or cable problem.
Flashing
The DTM is initializing.
Tip: You can install a maximum of three DTM modules in the BCM main unit, depending
on the available buses.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM system LEDs
BRIM LEDs
LEDs on a BRIM.
Figure 48 BRIM LEDs
Power LED
Status LED
Table 22 describes the functions of the BRIM LEDs.
Table 22 BRIM LED functions
LED
Status
Descriptions
Power
–
The ISDN line associated with the LED is active.
Status
–
ISDN line
ON
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Installation overview 83
Chapter 4
Installation overview
To install a BCM system, you install a BCM main unit, a BCM expansion unit (optional), and the
Figure 49 BCM system installation overview
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 Chapter 4 Installation overview
Table 23 BCM system installation overview (Sheet 1 of 2)
Tasks
Description
Link to
Prepare for installation
Verify these requirements:
•
•
•
environmental
electrical
site telephony wiring
Get required equipment
and tools
Ensure you have these items:
•
•
•
basic hardware
optional equipment
other hardware and tools
Check required
prerequisites
Verify environmental, electrical, and general requirements.
Install the main unit
Mount the main unit using these options:
•
•
•
in an equipment rack with a rack-mount shelf
on a wall with a wall-mount bracket
on a desktop
Install an expansion unit
(optional)
Mount the expansion unit using the same options as the
main unit:
•
•
•
in an equipment rack with a rack-mount shelf
on a wall with a wall-mount bracket
on a desktop
Install a media bay
module (MBM)
Follow these steps to install an MBM:
•
•
set the MBM DIP switches
insert the MBM into the main unit or expansion unit
Connect the cables
Connect the cables between these items:
•
•
•
power supply to units
lines and extensions to the MBMs
data networking hardware
Install telephones and
peripherals
These telephones can be installed:
•
•
•
•
System telephones
Emergency telephone
IP Phones
T7406 cordless system
Install an ATA2
Perform the steps to install an ATA2:
•
•
•
•
connect the ATA2
mount the ATA2
test insertion loss measurement
configure the ATA2
Install optional telephony Perform the steps to install:
equipment
•
•
•
auxiliary ringer
external paging system
external music source
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Installation overview 85
Table 23 BCM system installation overview (Sheet 2 of 2)
Tasks
Description
Link to
Initialize the system
Begin the configuring process for your system.
Set up the system and set Perform the basic system configuration using Element
configuration Manager, Startup Profile, or Telset Administration.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 Chapter 4 Installation overview
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites 87
Chapter 5
Checking the installation prerequisites
Refer to the following sections for information on BCM system installation prerequisites:
•
•
•
•
•
General requirements
Before you install the BCM main unit or expansion unit, complete the following actions:
•
Determine the location for the BCM main unit (or expansion unit), telephones, and other
equipment based on spacing and electrical requirements.
•
•
Order the required trunks from the central office.
Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you need to install the system.
Environmental requirements
Ensure you meet the installation environmental requirements. The installation area must be:
•
a minimum of 4 m (13 ft.) from equipment such as photocopiers, electrical motors, and other
equipment that produces electromagnetic, radio frequency, and electrostatic interference
•
•
•
•
•
•
within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of a three-wire grounded electrical outlet
clean, free of traffic and excess dust, dry, and well ventilated
within the temperature ranges of 10°C and 40°C (50°F and 104°F)
between 20% and 80% non-condensing relative humidity
structurally strong enough and with enough space to support the BCM units
a minimum of 46 cm (18 in.) from the floor
Note: The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water
damage.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites
Electrical requirements
Ensure you meet the following electrical requirements:
•
Power must be supplied from a non-switched, unobstructed outlet within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of the
BCM units.
•
The supplied power must be 100/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, and 10 A minimum service with a
third-wire safety ground. The third-wire safety ground provides shock protection and prevents
electromagnetic interference.
Danger: Risk of electric shock
The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third-wire ground. Use
only with the supplied BCM power supply and a three-wire power outlet.
Caution: Check ground connections
Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and
internal metal water pipe system, if present, are connected together. If these ground
connections are not connected together, contact the appropriate electrical inspection
authority. Do not try to make the connections yourself.
•
You can connect the power supply to a power bar. The total length of the power cables from
the power supply to the electrical outlet (including power bar) should not exceed 2 m (6.5 ft.).
You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body, with a third-wire
ground. Nortel recommends not to use an extension cord between the power supply and the
power bar, or between the power bar and the electrical outlet.
Site telephony wiring requirements
This section describes the requirements for wiring digital telephony devices (digital loop) and
analog telephony devices (analog loop) to the BCM system.
Refer to the following sections for information on the parameters for digital and analog loops:
•
•
Digital loop
The following parameters must be met for a digital loop:
•
•
•
one, two, or three twisted-pair cables per telephone
DC loop resistance of less than 64
cable length (0.5 mm or 24 AWG) less than 300 m (975 ft.)
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites 89
•
•
use of a station auxiliary power supply (SAPS) for loops 300 m (975 ft.) to 1200 m (3900 ft.).
In North America, the SAPS must be a CSA- or UL-approved Class 2 power source.
In Europe, the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked.
no bridge taps
Analog loop
The following parameters must be met for an analog loop:
•
•
maximum DC loop resistance of 208
maximum cable length (0.5 mm or 24 AWG) of 1220 m (4000 ft.)
System equipment, supplies, and tools
Refer to the following sections for the equipment required to install the BCM system:
•
•
•
Basic hardware
The BCM system consists of some combination of the following hardware:
•
•
•
•
•
main unit
expansion unit
media bay module (MBM)
telephones
cabling for connections between hardware units
Note: You must include specific features in the keycode file for some hardware to
function.
Optional equipment
You can add the following equipment to the BCM system to support specific requirements beyond
the basic hardware:
•
•
•
•
•
•
station auxiliary power supply (SAPS)
key indicator module (KIM) for T7316E telephones
analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) if connecting analog equipment to a digital extension line
uninterruptable power supply (UPS)
analog emergency telephone
optional WAN card field replaceable unit (FRU)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 Chapter 5 Checking the installation prerequisites
•
•
digital mobility controller (DMC), base stations, repeaters, and digital mobility phones
Wireless LAN handsets, SVP and TFTP servers, and access points
Countries outside of North America must order separately a power cord that conforms to their
specific requirements or standards. All North American main unit and expansion units are
equipped with a North American power cord.
Other hardware and tools
You need the following equipment to install a BCM unit:
•
mounting hardware (either a rack-mount bracket, a wall-mount bracket per unit, or four rubber
feet per unit)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phillips screwdriver #2
flat-blade screwdriver
pliers
antistatic grounding strap
punch-down tool
surge protector (recommended)
cables, 25-pair cable with right-feeding female RJ-21 connectors
3.5-mm mono audio jack (for external music source)
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Chapter 6
Installing the BCM main unit
This section describes how to install the BCM main unit. You can install the main unit in an
equipment rack, on a wall, or on a desktop.
Figure 50 shows the steps required to install the main unit.
Figure 50 Overview of installing the main unit
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit
Refer to the following sections for information on installing the main unit:
•
•
•
•
Unpacking the main unit
Open the main unit box and check that you have all of the components listed below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
one main unit
one power supply cable
four rubber feet
one set of rack-mount brackets
a documentation CD
the BCM 4.0 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide
Visually inspect the components for any damage that may have occurred during shipping. If you
find any damage, contact your Nortel sales representative.
Note: You must supply cable management tools or techniques depending on the
type of BCM system installation.
Installing the main unit in an equipment rack
You can install a BCM main unit in a standard 19-inch equipment rack along with your other
networking and telecommunications equipment. The BCM expansion unit installs in a similar
manner to the main units.
Caution: When installing the main unit in a rack, do not stack units directly on top
of one another in the rack.
Fasten each unit to the rack with the appropriate mounting brackets. Mounting
brackets cannot support multiple units.
For desk-mount installations, do not place anything directly on top of the BCM
main unit.
conditions before selecting a location for the BCM main unit.
Use the following procedures to install a BCM unit in a rack:
•
•
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 93
To attach the rack-mount brackets
1
2
3
Place the BCM main unit on a flat, clean surface.
Align the screw holes between the BCM main unit and the right rack-mount bracket.
Fasten the bracket to the BCM main unit using four screws.
Caution: Use only the screws supplied with the rack-mount bracket. Do not replace
the screws. Other screws can damage the unit.
4
5
Align the screw holes between the BCM main unit and the left rack-mount bracket.
53.
Note: Rack-mount bracket
The expansion unit rack-mount bracket has an additional set of holes that allows you
to install the brackets so that the expansion unit sits flush with the BCM main unit in
an equipment rack.
Figure 51 Attach the rack-mount bracket to the BCM200 main unit
Install rack-mount
bracket screws
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit
Figure 52 Attach the rack-mount bracket to the BCM400 main unit
Install rack-mount
bracket screws
Figure 53 Attach the mounting bracket to the expansion unit
To mount the main unit in an equipment rack
1
2
3
4
Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the main unit.
Position the main unit in the rack. Have an assistant hold the main unit.
Align the holes in the rack-mount bracket with the holes in the equipment rack rails.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit
Figure 56 Fasten the expansion unit to the equipment rack
Installing the main unit on the wall
This procedure describes how to mount the BCM200 or BCM400 main unit to a wall.
To mount the main unit on the wall, you need:
•
•
•
a wall-mount bracket kit NTAB3422
four #10 x 2.5 cm (#10 x 1 in.) round-head wood screws
a plywood backboard 2 cm (3/4 in.) thick
To mount the expansion unit on the wall, you need:
•
•
•
a wall-mount bracket (supplied with the unit)
two #10 x 2.5 cm (#10 x 1 in.) round-head wood screws
a plywood backboard 2 cm (3/4 in.) thick
environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM main unit.
Note: Nortel does not recommended use of the rack-mount brackets for wall-mount
applications.
To install the main unit on the wall
1
Mark the location of the plywood backboard on the wall using a pencil. Use a ruler and
bubble-level to check that the plywood backboard is level with respect to the wall.
2
Mount the plywood backboard securely to the wall.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 97
Note: If the backboard for the BCM main unit has enough room for the
expansion unit, you do not require a second backboard.
3
4
Choose a location on the backboard that is level and leaves enough space on the sides (23 cm
or 9 in.) to insert and remove the media bay modules (MBMs).
Mark the location of the wall-mount bracket holes on the plywood backboard.
a
b
Use the wall-mount bracket as a template.
Use a bubble-level to check that the wall-mount bracket is level with respect to the
plywood backboard.
5
Install four #10 x 2.5 cm (#10 x 1 in.) round-head wood screws in the backboard.
a
Do not tighten the screw heads against the backboard. Leave approximately 0.5 cm (0.25
in.) of the screw exposed from the backboard.
b
Perform a trial installation of the wall-mount bracket on the plywood backboard. Ensure
the wood screw heads seat in the wall-mount bracket slots. If the wood screws are too
tight, loosen until the screw heads fit fully in the slots.
c
d
Ensure that the wall-mount bracket is level with respect to the plywood backboard.
Remove the wall-mount bracket.
6
7
Align the screw holes on one side of the BCM main unit with the wall-mount bracket.
Note: The bracket suspends the BCM main unit on the wall. Consider the direction you
want the media bay modules to face, left or right, when you choose the side on which to
install the bracket.
Fasten the wall-mount brackets securely to the BCM main unit using the screws provided.
Caution: Use only the screws supplied with the wall-mount bracket kit
(NTAB3422). Do not replace the screws. Other screws can damage the unit.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit
Figure 57 Attach the wall-mount brackets to the BCM200 main unit
Install wall-mount
bracket screws
Figure 58 Attach the wall-mount brackets to the BCM400 main unit
Install wall-mount
bracket screws
8
9
Hang the BCM main unit on the backboard screws. Make sure the main unit is level. Ensure
the wood screw heads seat fully into the wall-mount bracket slots.
Tighten the wood screws against the wall-mount bracket.
Installing the main unit on a flat surface
Use this procedure to install the BCM main unit on any flat surface that can safely support the
weight of the unit.
environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM main unit.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit 99
Caution: Do not place anything directly on top of the BCM main unit or expansion unit.
To install the BCM main unit on a table or shelf
1
2
3
Attach four rubber feet to the corners on the bottom of the main unit.
Position the main unit on the table or shelf.
Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables and
media bay modules.
Next step
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 Chapter 6 Installing the BCM main unit
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit 101
Chapter 7
Installing an expansion unit
Adding an expansion unit increases the capacity of your BCM system by providing a method of
adding media bay modules (MBMs). Each MBM you add increases the number of public switched
telephone network (PSTN) trunks or extensions that you can connect to the BCM system.
Figure 59 shows the steps required to install the expansion unit.
Figure 59 Overview of installing a expansion unit
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit
Refer to the following sections for information on installing an expansion unit:
•
•
•
Unpacking the expansion unit
Open the expansion unit box and remove all the components. Check that you have the following
components:
•
•
•
•
one BCM expansion unit
one power supply cable
one expansion cable (shielded Ethernet cable)
four rubber feet
Visually inspect the components for any damage that may have occurred during shipping. If you
find any damage, contact your Nortel representative.
Warning: Make sure the power supply to the expansion unit is disconnected
before inserting or removing an MBM.
Installing the expansion unit
This section describes how to install the BCM expansion unit.
Make sure that the expansion unit is installed close enough to the main unit so that the supplied
5 m (16 ft) expansion cable can be connected between the expansion unit and main unit. The
expansion unit has the same environmental and electrical requirements as the main unit. For more
information about these requirements, refer to “Checking the installation prerequisites” on page
87.
The expansion unit can be mounted in a rack, on a wall, or on a desktop. Typically, the expansion
unit is mounted in the same way as the main unit.
The expansion unit is similar in design to the main unit, therefore, it is installed in the same
manner as the main unit. Refer to the following sections for procedures on mounting an expansion
unit:
•
•
•
Caution: When installing the BCM expansion unit in a rack, do not stack units directly
on top of one another. Fasten each unit to the rack with the separate mounting brackets.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit 103
Connecting the BCM expansion unit to the BCM main unit
After the expansion unit is installed in the desired location, use the supplied DS256 cable
(NTAB3086) to connect it to the BCM main unit. The cable has the following characteristics:
•
•
•
the cable must be shielded
the cable must be exactly 5 m long
Table 24 DS256 cable pinout
Expansion unit
PIN
Main unit
PIN
Signal name
Circuit name
Color
TXD +
TXD -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PAIR 3 (-)
PAIR 3 (+)
PAIR 2 (-)
PAIR 1 (+)
PAIR 1 (-)
PAIR 2 (+)
PAIR 4 (-)
PAIR 4 (+)
White-Green
Green
SYNC +
CLK +
CLK -
White-Orange
Blue
White-Blue
Orange
SYNC -
RXD +
RXD -
White-Brown
Brown
Figure 60 DS256 cable
Pin 1
Pin 1
Warning: The timing in the BCM system is critical. Use the correct length cable as
supplied with the expansion unit. The system will not work properly if you connect the
BCM expansion unit using a cable that varies in length.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 Chapter 7 Installing an expansion unit
To connect the expansion unit to the main unit
1
Plug one end of the supplied DS256 cable into the DS256 connector on the expansion unit
Figure 61 DS256 connector on the expansion unit
DS256 connector
2
Plug the other end of the cable into the DS256 connector on the faceplate of the MSC in the
Figure 62 BCM main unit DS256 connector
CTM
4
1
Aux
2
3
4
DSM 16+
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PowerStatus
DS256 connector
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 105
Chapter 8
Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Use the procedures in this chapter to select and install the media bay modules (MBM) in BCM
main unit and the expansion unit.
This chapter contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selecting MBMs for your BCM system
MBMs are plug-in devices that connect your extensions and the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) lines to the call processing capabilities of the BCM system.
When you order your BCM system, there are no MBMs installed. You can select the number and
type of MBMs that best suit your business requirements.
There are three types of MBMs:
•
•
•
For further information on the role and function of each type of MBM, refer to “Media bay
If you have a large BCM system, there are some configuration restrictions that can apply to your
system. For information about these restrictions, refer to “Assigning DS30 resources” on page
114.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Figure 63 Process for determining MBMs
Determine trunk
and extension
requirements
Determine which
DS30 buses are
available
Determine DS30
requirements for
each MBM
Set DIP switches on
MBMs
Install MBMs into the main
unit or expansion unit
Determine if any
offsets can be used
The first step in selecting the MBMs is to establish the number of extensions (internal lines) and
PSTN lines (trunk lines) you have or need. This step allows you to determine the number and type
of MBMs you require. The following sections describe how to determine which MBMs, and how
many, you require for your system.
•
•
•
After you determine the MBMs required, calculate how the MBMs use the available system
resources. The following sections describe how the MBMs work within the available channels on
the media services card (MSC) in the BCM system.
Selecting trunk MBMs
The number and type of lines coming into your system determine which trunk MBMs, and how
many MBMs, you require to support your needs. Trunk lines come from the public network
(PSTN) or they support connections in a private network.
If you are setting up an entirely new system, perform a site survey to determine your current and
future needs. Nortel recommends that you perform the survey before you order any MBMs.
Note: If you plan to add any lines in the near future, include them in your initial estimates.
To select trunk MBMs
1
or type of lines you have, contact your service provider.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 107
2
Use the number of lines and the number of lines per MBM to determine how many MBMs you
need.
Table 25 Determine trunk MBM requirements
Number
of lines Type of MBM
Number of lines
per MBM
Number of MBMs
required
Type of lines
T1 digital lines
DTM
24
______ DTM
______ DDIM
Universal T1 MUX digital
lines
DDIM
24
(also requires a full
DS30 bus for the data
module)
PRI digital lines (NA)
E1 digital lines
PRI digital lines (EMEA)
Analog lines
DTM
23
30
30
4
______ DTM
______ DTM
______ DTM
______ CTM
______ CTM
______ GATM
______ GATM
______ CTM
DTM
DTM
CTM4
CTM8
GATM4
GATM8
Analog lines
8
Analog lines
4
Analog lines
8
Analog lines
4x16 combination MBM
4
(also requires half of
the next DS30 bus for
the DSM16 part)
BRI ISDN lines
BRIM S/T
4 ISDN loops
______ BRIM S/T
For example:
•
If you require 24 T1 digital lines, you need 1 DTM because a single DTM can handle 24
T1 lines (North America).
•
If you require 2 analog lines and 24 T1 digital lines, you need 1 GATM4 and 1 DTM.
Note: Although the DTM supports several types of digital lines, you cannot connect
different types of lines to the same DTM. You can add a maximum of three DTMs or
DDIMs to your BCM system.
Tip: The BCM400 main unit holds a maximum of four MBMs. If you require more
MBMs, the BCM expansion unit supports a maximum of six additional MBMs.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Selecting station MBMs
The number and type of telephones and related equipment you have determines which station
MBMs you require.
Note: If you are adding any extensions in the near future, include them in your
calculations.
To select station MBMs
1
2
Use the number of extensions and the number of extensions per MBM to determine how many
MBMs you need.
Table 26 Determine station MBMs requirements
Number of
Number of extensions Number of MBMs
Type of extension
extensions
Type of MBM
per MBM
required
Digital extensions
Digital extensions
Digital extensions
Analog extensions
Analog extensions
Specialty modules
DSM16/DSM16+
DSM32/DSM32+
4x16
16
32
16
8
_____ DSM16
_____ DSM32
_____ DSM16
_____ ASM8
_____ GASM8
ASM8
GASM8
8
Digital extensions are digital or IP telephones. You do not need to include IP telephones when calculating the number
of required DSM MBMs. For a list of the telephones that can be used with the BCM system, refer to “Telephones and
Analog extensions include single-line telephones, fax machines, and modems.
For example, in North America:
•
•
If you require 12 digital extensions, you need 1 DSM16/DSM16+
If you require 24 digital extensions, you need 1 DSM32/DSM32+
Note: If you require only a few analog extensions, you can use an ATA 2 to connect these
devices to your DSM16(+), DSM32(+), or the DSM connector on a 4x16 MBM. Each
analog extension requires an ATA 2.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 109
Selecting a fiber expansion module (FEM)
The FEM allows you to connect a maximum of six Norstar MBMs to a BCM system. Each FEM
connection requires one DS30 bus, therefore, the BCM used for this purpose can only support one
FEM module if you are converting a fully-configured Norstar system.
Note: The DIP switch settings you chose determine which FEM ports are available. If you
enable all six FEM ports, the BCM system has no more DS30 resources available.
Therefore, you cannot connect more MBMs to the system.
Determining system capacity
After you have selected the MBMs you require, you must ensure that the BCM system can support
all the MBMs. System capacity is ultimately determined by the line requirements of each MBM.
The following sections describe the DS30 buses, which manage the DS30 buses, and how you fit
your MBMs into the overall system planning:
•
•
•
Understanding DS30 numbers
A DS30 bus is a block of virtual pathways on the media services card (MSC).
On a default system, six buses of DS30 channel blocks can be assigned to MBMs. The block to
which the MBM is assigned determines the range of line (trunk) numbers or extension numbers
(DNs) that can be allocated by the MBM to the equipment connected to that MBM. The other two
blocks are permanently routed to the PEC digital signal processors (DSPs) to support internal
BCM functions such as voice mail, VoIP trunks, IVR, and IP telephony functions. This
configuration is called a 2/6 bus split.
You can change the DS30 allocation to a 3/5 split to accommodate increased IP telephony or VoIP
trunk requirements. You do this by assigning bus 7 to the voice data sector. This choice should be
made at system startup, but a default system can be changed through Element Manager to a 3/5
split after startup if IP requirements increase. You indicate the split you want when you configure
the system.
Warning: If you change the bus split from 3/5 to 2/6 after your system is configured, you
will lose all the data and optional application connections.
Figure 64 shows a model of how the MSC DS30 buses are a subgroup of the DS256 bus on the
MSC. The diagram also shows the offset channels, which are a subgroup of the buses.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Figure 64 DS30 model
Four offsets per bus
DS256
on MSC
DS30 bus #2
DS30 bus #3
DS30 buses
DS30 buses
available to modules
in a 3/5 split
available to modules
in a 2/6 split
DS30 bus #4
DS30 bus #5
DS30 bus #6
DS30 bus #7
DS30 numbers are set using the number 4, 5, and 6 DIP switches on the back or underside of the
MBMs. The exception is the FEM MBM. The FEM DIP switches turn on ports, each of which
consumes one bus.
Setting offsets
Each offset represents one-quarter of a DS30 bus. Each bus supports 16 lines (32 time slots) for
most MBMs.
Note: Double Density
The 32 time slots are important when you are working with station MBMs. The DSM16+,
DSM32+, ASM8+, and GASM8 can be configured, using the offset DIP switches, to use
each of these time slots as separate telephone lines. This, essentially, doubles your system
telephone capacity.
Exceptions:
•
•
DTM MBMs, which support 23 to 30 lines per bus
FEM MBMs, where each bus supports one Norstar fiber module connection.
Offsets are numbered 0, 1, 2, and 3. MBMs that require less than a full bus can be assigned a DS30
number and an offset number. This allows more than one MBM to be assigned the same DS30
number, but with a different offset number.
MBMs that can have offsets assigned include CTM4, CTM8, BRIM S/T, ASM8+, and GASM8.
For example, two CTM8s can be assigned to the same DS30 number, with different offset
numbers. However, you cannot assign a CTM8 and a BRIM to the same DS30.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 111
Offsets are assigned using DIP switches 1, 2, and 3 on the MBM.
Note: MBMs that do not, or cannot, share DS30 buses always assign the offset as 0
(zero). As well, if the MBM requires more than one bus, such as the 4x16 or the DDIM,
only the first DS30 is set on the DIP switches. The next consecutive DS30 bus is
automatically assigned by the MBM.
Figure 65 on page 111 shows a DS30 broken down into four offset groups of four (single density)
or eight (double density) lines each.
Note: When you enable a station MBM for double density, the line numbers double.
Figure 65 Offsets are part of DS30 channel line groups
Offset 0
Offsets have
1 DS30 bus
4 lines (single-density)
8 lines (double-density)
Offset 1
Offset 2
Offset 3
16 lines/32 time slots (single-density)
32 lines/32 time slots (double-density)
Determining bus requirements
Figure 66 shows the DS30 bus requirements of each MBM. Note the differences between MBMs
set to single density and MBMs set to double density.
Note: If you choose a CTM8, DDIM, or 4x16, there are some restrictions on the offsets
you can choose. Refer to the DIP switch settings in “CTM switch settings” on page 123
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Figure 66 Space requirements for MBMs, on a per-DS30 configuration
Trunks (lines)
Stations (extensions)
1 DS30 bus/
offset set to 0
Single-density modules
Double-density modules
1 DS30 bus
1 DTM per
DS30
1 DS30 bus/
offset set to 0
4 DD ASM 8s or
GASM8s per
DS30
1 DSM 16
per DS30
1 DS30 bus/offset
set to 0, 1, or 2
3 BRIs
per DS30
1 DS30 bus
2 DS30 buses/
offset set to 0
2 DD DSM 16+
per DS30
1 DS30 bus/offset
set to 0, 1, 2, or 3
1 DSM 32
per 2 DS30s
4 CTMs
per DS30
1 DS30 bus
1 DD DSM 32+
per DS30
1 DS30 bus/offset
set to 0, 1, or 2
CTM8s
max of 2
offsets per
DS30
1 DS30 bus/offset
set to 0, 1, 2, or 3
1 DS30 bus/offset
set to 0, 1, or 2
GATM8 max
of 2 offsets
per DS30
4 GATM4s
per DS30
Figure 67 on page 113 illustrates the space requirements for special MBMs.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 113
Figure 67 Space requirements for special MBMs
Combination and specialized media bay modules
DDIM module
4x16 module
2 DS30 buses/
offset set to 0, 1, 2, or 3
2 DS30 buses/
offset set to 0
1 full DS30
for DTM
module
1 offset of
1 full DS30
for lines
1 full DS30
1 full DS30
for data
for telephone
and equipment
connections
1/2 DS30 for
the stations
Note: The FEM module requires a
DS30 bus for each port that is
active. If all ports are active, no
other modules can be added to
the system.
To determine bus requirements
1
Make a list of MBMs and the space requirements for each MBM you chose. Refer to the
following table.
Table 27 Matching MBMs to DS30 bus capacity
DS30 split
2/6 (default) _____
3/5 (extra IP lines) _____
DS30s/offsets required
Type of module
Number required
2
3
Set the bus numbers and offsets on the MBM DIP switches. Refer to “Determining MBM DIP
switch settings” on page 116. Note that you assign trunk MBMs starting from the bottom
DS30, and you assign station MBMs starting from the top DS30.
Install the MBMs into the BCM main unit or expansion unit. Refer to “Installing a media bay
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Assigning DS30 resources
MBMs are assigned to DS30 buses in a specific hierarchical manner. This section describes the
preferred order of positioning for each type of MBM.
The following are some general notes about assigning MBMs:
•
The DIP switches on the DDIM are used to set the DS30 designation for the DTM part of the
MBM. The MBM automatically assigns an additional DS30 for the data part of the DDIM.
You cannot choose DS30 7 for the DDIM because the data MBM would not be accessible. The
•
If you chose a 3/5 bus split for your system, DS30 7 cannot be used by any MBM. For MBMs
that require two buses, this means that you cannot set the DIP switches to DS30 6 for those
MBMs because the second level of lines falls into DS30 7, which is not accessible (see Figure
•
•
DS30 bus splits.
DSM32 MBMs require two DS30 numbers. When you assign the first DS30 number to a
DSM32, the MBM automatically adds the next DS30 number. For example, if you assign
DS30 2 to a DSM32, it uses DS30 2 and 03. However, you cannot choose DS30 7 for the
DSM32 because the second level of DSM lines would not be accessible. The same applies to
•
•
DSM 32+ MBMs can be set to either single or double density. When they are set to double
density, the MBM only requires one DS30 bus.
The DIP switches on the 4x16 are used to set the DS30 designation and offset for the CTM
part of the MBM. The MBM automatically assigns the first half of the next bus for the 16
DSM lines. However, you cannot choose DS30 7 for the 4x16 because the DSM lines would
not be accessible. The same applies to DS30 6 if your system is set to a 3/5 split. Refer to
•
•
The CTM8 uses two offsets on a DS30 bus. You assign the first offset to the MBM, and the
second offset is automatically selected. This means that you can choose offset pairs 0-1, 1-2,
or 2-3. Because the MBM requires two offsets on the same DS30, you cannot select offset 3.
Not all MBMs are available to all systems. Refer to “Selecting MBMs for your BCM system”
on page 105 for specifics about each MBM.
Note: Remember, if you have chosen a 3/5 bus split for your system, DS30 bus 7 is no
longer available for MBMs.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 115
Choosing the assigned order for MBMs
Station MBMs are assigned starting with DS30 2. This allows telephones to start numbering from
the system Start DN (the default is 221).
Trunk MBMs are assigned starting at DS30 7 in a system with a 2/6 DS30 split, and at DS30 6 in a
system with a 3/5 split. The exception to this is the 4x16 and the DDIM, which require two DS30
buses that must be set to a DS30 that has the next bus open.
Figure 68 Assigning single-density MBMs to the DS30 bus hierarchy
After you choose your MBMs, choose where to
assign them on the DS30 buses
Example of a
European- based
setup
Example of
North American-
based setup
DN assignment
DS30
begins with Start DN
buses
DS30
buses
(default: 221)
2
Station MBMs are assigned
2
DSM 32
starting at the top (DS30 2) of
the available MBM DS30
buses.
DSM 32
3
3
4
5
CTM
CTM
CTM
4
5
DSM 16
Trunk MBMs are assigned
starting with the last
available MBM DS30 bus
(DS30 6 or 7, depending on
the bus split in effect).
4x16
BRI
DS30 5 supports the
station part of the 4x16
6
6
Exception: a 4x16 or a DDIM
cannot be assigned to the
last DS30 bus.
BRI
DSM 32
7*
DECT
7*
Lines start at 61 on
DS30 7
3/5 bus split
DSM 16
DSM 32
6
* DS30 7 is not available to any MBM if your system has been
configured with a 3/5 bus split
MBMs that require two DS30 buses, such as the DSM32 and the
4x16, must be assigned to DS30s higher than 6, to accommodate all
the resource requirements.
7*
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Determining MBM DIP switch settings
Assign DIP switch settings before you install an MBM. The DIP switches are located on the back
or underside of the MBM.
Note: Fiber expansion module (FEM) switches
The switches on the fiber expansion module (FEM) do not work in the same way as those
of the trunk or station MBMs. On the FEM, the switches turn the fiber ports on and off.
For information about setting the switches on an FEM, refer to “FEM switch settings” on
To determine MBM DIP switch settings
1
the following steps.
2
3
4
Number the order in which you want to assign the MBMs.
Determine the number of DS30s each MBM requires. For some station MBMs this depends on
whether you choose to set the MBM to single or double density.
5
6
Circle the DS30 bus and offset numbers.
Follow the DS30 bus and offset numbers to the far right column where the switch settings are
indicated. Circle the setting for each MBM.
Note: If you must assign specific line or extension numbers to an MBM, refer to the
and DN listings.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 117
Figure 69 How to use the configuration map
1. Indicate the modules you want to install
2. Note how many DS30 buses each module requires
4. Assign an offset
number to each module
Media bay module positioning
1
DIP switch setting
DS30
bus #
ASM8/
GASM
8
CTM/
GATM
4
Off-set
CTM8/
GATM
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
4x16
DTM
(offset)
(DS30 ch)
BRI
4
2
on on on on on on
0
5
3
2
2
7
on on on off on off
on on off off on off
on off on off on off
on off off off on off
0
1
2
3
4
3
5
3. Choose the DS30 numbers to
assign to the modules
5. Make a note of the DIP switch settings for the DS30/offset numbers
DIP switch setting for offset
Example: Position your DSM 32 MBM (step 1), which requires two full DS30 buses (step 2), in
DS30 2 and 3 (step 3). Moving across, note that the offset is 0 (step 4). Set the DIP switches on the
MBM to match the DIP switch settings indicated for that offset (step 5).
Table 28 shows possible DS30 and offset configurations for each type of trunk MBM, and the
Table 28 Possible trunk MBM DIP switch settings (Sheet 1 of 2)
DIP switch settings
Trunk MBM positioning
DS30
bus #
4x16
Offsets
0,1, 2, 3
DDIM
DTM CTM CTM8 GATM GATM8 BRI
Offset Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets
Offsets
Offset
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0, 1, 2
0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2,
3
Line Exten.
0, 1, 2,
3
0, 1, 2,
3
(offset)
(DS30 #)
0
1
2
3
Picks
up
ch. #3
0
Picks
up
ch. #3
0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
2
on on on on on on
on on off on on on
on off on on on on
on off off on on on
0
1
2
3
1
2
2
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Table 28 Possible trunk MBM DIP switch settings (Sheet 2 of 2)
DIP switch settings
Trunk MBM positioning
DS30
bus #
4x16
Offsets
DDIM
DTM CTM CTM8 GATM GATM8 BRI
Offsets
0,1, 2, 3
Line Exten.
Offset
0
Offset Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets Offsets
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0, 1, 2
0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2,
3
0, 1, 2,
3
0, 1, 2,
3
(offset)
(DS30 #)
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
Picks
up
ch. #4
0
0
0
0
Picks
up
ch. #4
0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
1
2
on on on on on off
on on off on on off
on off on on on off
on off off on on off
on on on on off on
on on off on off on
on off on on off on
on off off on off on
on on on on off off
on on off on off off
on off on on off off
on off off on off off
on on on off on on
on on off off on on
on off on off on on
on off off off on on
on on on off on off
on on off off on off
on off on off on off
on off off off on off
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
Picks
up
ch. #5
Picks
up
ch. #5
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
1
2
Picks
up
ch. #6
Picks
up
ch. #6
0
1
2
0
1
2
5
Picks
up
ch. #7
Picks
up
ch. #7
0
1
2
0
1
2
6
0
1
2
0
1
2
Not
supported
Not
7***
supported
MBM set to offset 0
MBM set to offset 1
MBM set to offset 2
MBM set to offset 3
Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 bus, and the offset, which the MBM requires.
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 bus split, DS30 bus 7 is not available to MBM and DS30 bus 6 is not
supported for the 4x16 and DDIM.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 119
Table 29 shows possible DS30 and offset configurations for each type of station MBM, and the
corresponding switch settings. Note that DIP switch 1 indicates the density mode for DSM 16+
and DSM 32+ (SDD = single density, DIP switch 1:on; FDD = Double Density, DIP switch 1:off).
Table 29 Possible station MBM DIP switch settings
DIP switch settings
(Single density)
DIP switch settings
(Double density)
Station MBM positioning
ASM 8/
DSM16+
DSM32+
GASM8
DS30 Offsets 0, 1 Offsets 0, 1 Offsets 0,
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
bus # SDDFDD
SDDFDD
1, 2, 3
(offset)
(DS30 #)
(offset)
(DS30 #)
Offsets
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0***
1
on on on on on on
on on off on on on
on off on on on on
on off off on on on
on on on on on off
on on off on on off
on off on on on off
on off off on on off
on on on on off on
on on off on off on
on off on on off on
on off off on off on
on on on on off off
on on off on off off
on off on on off off
on off off on off off
on on on off on on
on on off off on on
on off on off on on
on off off off on on
on on on off on off
on on off off on off
on off on off on off
on off off off on off
off on on on on on
off on off on on on
off off on on on on
off off off on on on
off on on on on off
off on off on on off
off off on on on off
off off off on on off
off on on on off on
off on off on off on
off off on on off on
off off off on off on
off on on on off off
off on off on off off
off off on on off off
off off off on off off
off on on off on on
off on off off on on
off off on off on on
off off off off on on
off on on off on off
off on off off on off
off off on off on off
off off off off on off
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
4
2
3
0
0
1
5
2
3
0
0
1
6*
7*
2
3**
0
1
2
3**
MBM set to offset 0
MBM set to offset 1
MBM set to offset 2
MBM set to offset 3
Each shaded square represents the amount of the DS30 bus, and the offset, which the MBM requires.
* If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, DS30 7 is not available to MBMs.
** ASM MBMs always use the single density DIP switch settings, with the appropriate offset.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Setting MBM DIP switches
Before you install the MBMs into the BCM system, you must set the DIP switches. Make a note of
To set MBM DIP switches
1
Figure 70 MBM DIP switches
Underside of the
MBM
Off
On
6 5 4 3 2 1
MBM is
right-side up
On
1 2 3 4 5 6
DIP switches
Back of the MBM
Off
Rear view of the MBM
Note: The GASM and GATM MBMs have a different DIP switch configuration
2
3
Set the switches to correspond with the settings you chose in the procedure “To determine
Repeat step 2 for each MBM you want to install.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 121
4
You are now ready to install the MBMs into the BCM system. Refer to “Installing optional
telephony equipment” on page 173 for details.
Tip: Create a label with the DS30 bus and DIP switch settings. Affix the label to the front
of the MBM as a quick reference during maintenance activities.
Assigning line and extension numbers
The switch settings on the MBM determine the line numbers and extension numbers the MBMs
use. The tables in this section show the correspondence between DS30 numbers, switch settings,
and the line and extension numbers for each type of MBM. The DS30 number and switch settings
DTM switch settings
Although DTMs have more than 16 lines, they occupy only one DS30 bus per DTM.
Table 30 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus, and the resulting line assignments.
Table 30 DTM switch settings (T1)
To
Enter these switch
settings
Select Enter these switch settings
DS30
Select
DS30
bus
assign
these
lines
To assign
these lines
bus
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
on on on on on on
on on on on on
on
on on on
on on
211-234
181-204
151-174
121-144
91-114
61-84
2
3
4
5
6
off off
on on
off
on
on
off
on
on on on on
on on
on
off
***7
off
off
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, DS30 bus 7 is not available.
Table 31 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus, and the resulting line assignments.
Table 31 DTM switch settings (North American PRI)
Enter these switch settings
To
Enter these switch settings
Select
DS30
bus
Select
DS30
bus
Toassign
these
assign
these
lines
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
lines
on on on on on on
on
on
on
on
off off
on on
2
3
4
211-233
181-203
151-173
5
6
121-143
91-113
61-83
on on on on on
on on on on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
off
on
off
off
***7
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, DS30 bus 7 is not available.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Table 32 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus, and the resulting line assignments.
Table 32 DTM switch settings (E1 and UK PRI)
Enter these switch settings
To
Enter these switch settings
To
Select
DS30
bus
Select
DS30
bus
assign
these
lines
assign
these
lines
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
on on on on on on
on on on on on
on on on on
on
on
on
on
off off
on on
2
3
4
211-240
181-210
151-180
5
6
121-150
91-120
61-90
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
off
on
off
off
***7
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, DS30 bus 7 is not available.
DDIM switch settings
The DDIM combines a DTM and a data module. The switch setting you choose determines the
DS30 bus assigned to the DTM portion of the DDIM. The data module is automatically assigned
the next DS30 bus number.
The DS30 bus you assign to the DDIM determines the line numbers of the T1 line connected to the
Table 33 DDIM switch settings
Enter these switch
To
Data
Enter these switch
settings
To
Data
Select
DS30
bus
settings
assign module
these
lines
Select
DS30
bus
assign module
these
lines
DS30
bus
DS30
bus
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
on on on on on on 211-234
on on on on on off 181-204
on on on on off on 151-174
on on on on off off 121-144
on on on off on on 91-114
2
3
4
3
4
5
5
6
7
6
7*
**
* If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, you cannot use DS30 bus 6 for the DDIM. When you use a 3/5
split, DS30 bus 7 is not available for the data module portion of the DDIM.
** You cannot use DS30 bus 7 for the DDIM. If you assign DS30 bus 7, there is no DS30 bus available for the data
module portion of the DDIM.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 123
BRI switch settings
You can install a maximum of three BRIM MBMs per DS30 bus on the offsets indicated in
Table 34 BRIM S/T switch settings
Enter these switch
settings
To
Enter these switch
settings
Select
DS30
bus
Select
DS30
bus
To assign
these
lines
Select
offset
assign
these
lines
Select
offset
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
on on on on on on
on on on on on
on on on on
off off
off off
off off
on on
on on
on on
2
3
4
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
211-218
219-226
227-234
181-188
189-196
197-204
151-158
159-166
167-174
5
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
121-128
129-136
137-144
91-98
on on
on
off
on on on on
off
on on
off
on
on
on on on
off
on on on on on
off
off
off
on
on
on
off
6
on on
on on
on on
off off
off
99-106
107-114
61-68
on
on on on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on on on on
on on on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
***7
on on
on
on on
off off
off
69-76
on
on on
on
on
off off
off
77-84
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, DS30 bus 7 is not available.
CTM switch settings
There are two models of CTMs.
CTM4: The CTM4 provides connections for four analog calling line identification (CLID) PSTN
lines. Each voice line uses one line in the offset. Because each DS30 bus has four lines per offset,
you can assign a maximum of four CTMs to a single DS30 bus by making the offset switch
settings different for each MBM. You can also combine three CTMs with the trunk part of the
4x16 on the same DS30 bus.
CTM8: The CTM8 provides connections for eight analog calling line identification (CLID) PSTN
lines. Each line uses one voice line. Because each DS30 bus has four lines per offset, you require
two offsets. You can assign a maximum of two CTM8s to a DS30 bus by making the offset switch
settings different for each MBM. You can also combine a CTM8 with a 4x16 on the same DS30
number. When you choose an offset number for the CTM8, the system automatically adds the next
offset number. You cannot assign offset 3 to the CTM8 because this does not allow the MBM to
assign the second set of lines.
You can also mix the two MBMs. For instance, if you have two existing CTM MBMs with offset
0 and 1, you can add a CTM8 on offset 2.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Table 35 shows the switch settings for each DS30 number, and the resulting line assignments for
CTMs and CTM8s.
Table 35 CTM4 and CTM8 switch settings
To assign these lines
CTM8
Select Select
Enter these switch settings
To assign
these lines
DS30
bus
offset
Lower
Upper
CTM4
1
2
3
4
5
6
(lines 1-4)
(lines 5-8)
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
211-214
219-222
227-230
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
211-214
219-222
227-230
235-238
181-184
189-192
197-200
205-208
151-154
159-162
167-170
175-178
121-124
129-132
137-140
145-148
91-94
219-222
227-230
2
3
235-238
Not supported
181-184
Not supported
189-192
off off
on
on
off
on
off
on
189-192
197-200
197-200
205-208
Not supported
Not supported
off off
on
on
off
on
off
on
151-154
159-162
167-170
159-162
167-170
175-178
4
off off
Not supported Not supported
on
on
off
on
off
on
off off
off off
off off
off off
121-124
129-132
137-140
129-132
137-140
145-148
5
off off
Not supported Not supported
on
on
off
on
off off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
91-94
99-102
107-110
99-102
107-110
115-118
99-102
107-110
115-118
61-64
6
off
off off off
Not supported Not supported
on
on
off off
on
on off off off
off
61-64
69-72
77-80
69-72
77-80
85-88
on
69-72
***7
on off
off
77-80
85-88
Not supported Not supported
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, DS30 bus 7 is not available.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 125
GATM switch settings
There are two models of GATM:
GATM 4: The GATM 4 provides connections for four analog calling line identification (CLID) or
supervision disconnect PSTN lines. Each voice line uses one line in the DS30 bus offset. Because
each DS30 bus has four lines per offset, you can assign a maximum of four GATM4s to a single
DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each MBM.
GATM 8: The GATM 8 provides connections for eight analog calling line identification (CLID)
or supervision disconnect PSTN lines. Each line uses one line in the DS30 bus offset. Because
each DS30 bus has four lines per offset, you require two offsets for each GATM 8. You can assign
a maximum of two GATM 8s to a DS30 bus by making the offset switch settings different for each
MBM.
You can also combine a GATM 8 with a 4x16 on the same DS30 number. When you choose an
offset number for the GATM 8, the system automatically adds the next offset number. You cannot
assign offset 3 to the GATM 8 because this does not allow the MBM to assign the second set of
lines.
There are two sets of DIP switches located on the rear of the GATM:
•
•
The left set allows you to determine the DS30 bus and offset for the MBM.
The right set allows you to manually configure a country profile operation, which is required
for earlier versions of software.
However, BCM 3.6 and newer software supports downloadable firmware for the North America,
Taiwan, UK, and Australia telephony profiles. BCM 3.6.1 and newer versions of BCM software
also support the Poland profile (in download mode only). To allow the GATM to download the
parameters for these countries and to allow for firmware upgrades, set all the country DIP switches
to 0 (zero/off) (factory default). The MSC telephony profile you choose must support the
Figure 71 GATM switch settings
Rear of GATM
For BCM 3.6 and newer software,
ensure all switches
are off
Dip # Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Country 3
Country 2
Country 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
ON
Mode select
Country select
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Table 36 lists the DIP switch settings for the GATM country select DIP switches.
Table 36 GATM country select DIP switch settings
Country select DIP switch settings
1 2
Setting for automatic downloads (all countries)
off off off off off off off off Download based on profile off off off off off off off on North America (600 ohms)
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 2
3
4
5
6
78
Manual settings (pre-BCM 3.5 systems)
off off off off off off on off
off off off off off off on on
off off off off off on off off
Taiwan
Australia
United Kingdom
off off off off off on off on North America (900 ohms)
Table 37 lists the possible DIP switch settings for the GATM mode select DIP switches.
Table 37 GATM mode select switch settings
Mode select DIP switch settings
Offset positions
Offset positions
Dip switch settings
Dip switch settings
DS30
bus #
DS30
bus #
Off-
sets
Off-
sets
GATM4 GATM8
GATM4 GATM8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Offsets
Offsets
Offsets
Offsets
(offset)
(DS30 #)
(offset)
(DS30 #)
0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2
0, 1, 2, 3 0, 1, 2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
2
0
2
0
2
on on on on on on
on on off on on on
on off on on on on
on off off on on on
on on on on on off
on on off on on off
on off on on on off
on off off on on off
on on on on off on
on on off on off on
on off on on off on
on off off on off on
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
2
0
2
0
2
on on on on off off
on on off on off off
on off on on off off
on off off on off off
on on on off on on
on on off off on on
on off on off on on
on off off off on on
on on on off on off
on on off off on off
on off on off on off
on off off off on off
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7***
4x16 switch settings
The 4x16 MBM combines a CTM and a DSM16. The CTM only requires four lines on the DS30
bus. Therefore, it can be assigned any of the four offsets in a DS30 bus. The DSM then
automatically assigns the next DS30 bus and all the assigned DNs.
The 4x16 MBM can be combined with three other CTMs or one CTM8 on the same DS30 bus.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 127
Table 38 shows the switch settings for each DS30 bus, and the assigned lines and dialing numbers
(DNs) for each DS30 bus.
Table 38 4x16 switch settings
Select
DS30
bus #
Enter these switch settings
Select
offset
To assign
these lines
And this DS30 bus
and DNs
2 Custom DN
range
1
2
3
4
5
6
on
02
0
on
on
on
on
on
211-214
DS30, bus 03
237-252 (2.5 upgrade)
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
219-222
227-230
235-238
181-184
189-192
197-200
205-208
151-154
159-162
167-170
175-178
121-124
129-132
137-140
145-148
91-94
253-268 (new system)
03
04
05
06
071
DS30, bus 04
253-268 (2.5 upgrade)
285-292 (new system)
DS30, bus 05
269-284 (2.5 upgrade)
317-332 (new system)
DS30, bus 06
285-300 (2.5 upgrade)
349-364 (new system)
1
DS30, bus 07
99-102
107-110
115-118
301-316 (2.5 upgrade)
381-396 (new system)
Not supported
1 If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, you cannot configure this module for DS30 6 because DS30 7 is
not available for the second level.
2 The extensions listed are based on a three-digit DN with a Start DN of 221. If your system has longer DNs or a
different Start DN, enter the range in the blank column.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
ASM 8 and GASM8 switch settings
In a single-density configuration, such as for DS30 6 or 7 when they are set to the default PDD,
only offset 1 and 2 are available to ASM 8/GASM8. In a double-density configuration, you can
number and the dialing numbers (DNs) assigned to each DS30 number.
Table 39 ASM 8 settings
Select Select
bus offset
Enter these switch
settings
To
Select
offset
Enter these switch
settings
To
**Custom
DN range
assign
these
DNs
assign
these
DNs
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2.5 system upgraded to 3.0
3.0 and newer systems
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
on on on on on on 221-228
on on off on on on 229-236
on off on on on on 377-384
on off off on on on 385-392
on on on on on off 237-244
on on off on on off 245-252
on off on on on off 393-400
on off off on on off 401-408
on on on on off on 253-260
on on off on off on 261-268
on off on on off on 409-416
on off off on off on 417-424
on on on on off off 269-276
on on off on off off 277-284
on off on on off off 425-432
on off off on off off 433-440
on on on off on on 285-292
on on off off on on 293-300
on off on off on on 441-448
on off off off on on 449-456
on on on off on off 301-308
on on off off on off 309-316
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
on on on on on on 221-228
on on off on on on 229-236
on off on on on on 237-244
on off off on on on 245-252
on on on on on off 253-260
on on off on on off 261-268
on off on on on off 269-276
on off off on on off 277-284
on on on on off on 285-292
on on off on off on 293-300
on off on on off on 301-308
on off off on off on 309-316
on on on on off off 317-324
on on off on off off 325-332
on off on on off off 333-340
on off off on off off 341-348
on on on off on on 349-356
on on off off on on 357-364
on off on off on on 365-372
on off off off on on 373-380
on on on off on off 381-388
on on off off on off 389-396
2
3
4
5
6
7***
*****2 on off on off on off 457-464
*****2 on off on off on off 397-404
*****3 on off off off on off 465-472
*****3 on off off off on off 405-412
** The extensions listed are based on a three-digit DN with a Start DN of 221. If your system has longer DNs or a
different Start DN, enter the range in the blank column.
*** If your system is configured with a 3/5 split, DS30 7 is not available.
*****Available only on systems set to double density with a 2/6 DS30 split.
GASM8 mode and country switch settings
The GASM8 has a second set of eight DIP switches on the right side, at the rear of the MBM, that
allow you to choose a mode of function, based on country of operation. These settings are
dependant on the version of the system software.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 129
Table 40 GASM8 modes and features
GASM8 modes
Standard
Enhanced
Mode features
Basic call features for analog devices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Message Waiting Indication (MWI)
Firmware download capability
Disconnect Supervision
Calling Line Identification (CLID)
The GASM8 has the following switches:
•
•
•
•
Switch 1: firmware download capability
— off = Standard mode
— on = Enhanced mode
Switch 2: when to download firmware (for the enhanced mode only)
— off = automatic firmware download from BCM (default)
— on = forced firmware download from BCM system cold start
Switch 3: echo cancellation
— off = Enabled (default)
— on = Disabled
Switches 4-8: settings choices are based on a country profile. Refer to the tables below for the
correct settings to ensure proper functionality.
Standard mode
Mode select
DIP switch
settings
Country select
DIP switch settings
Country profile
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
North America
United Kingdom
Australia
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
on
Poland
on on
Note: Switch settings not shown in this table will default to the North American
profile.
Enhanced mode
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
on
off
North America
United Kingdom
Australia
on
on
on
on
Poland
on on
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Note: Switch settings not shown in this table will default to the North American
profile.
Table 41 ASM8+ country select DIP switch settings
Manual settings
Manual settings
(BCM 3.6 and newer systems)
Country profile
(pre-BCM 3.6 systems)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
off off off off off off off off North America
on
on
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
off off off off off off off
United Kingdom
on
DSM switch settings
There are different types of DSMs:
•
DSM16/DSM16+ have one connector, which connects to 16 lines (telephones). These
modules require a full DS30 number each (single density) or half a bus (double density).
•
DSM32/DSM32+ have two connectors, each of which connects to 16 lines (telephones).
These modules require two full, consecutive DS30 numbers (single density) or one full bus
(double density).
This section includes these charts:
•
•
•
•
DSM16/DSM32 single-density switch settings (upgraded system)
The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a
system. For single-density modules, you set the first DS30 number on the DIP switches and the
numbers and that there are only five possible DS30 settings for the DIP switches.
Note: DSM modules deployed with 2.5 systems are all single density and cannot be set to
double density. The DSM 16+ and DSM 32+ modules can be set to either density.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 131
Table 42 DSM16/DSM16+ and DSM32/DSM32+ single-density switch settings (upgraded system)
Enter these switch
settings
Select
DS30
bus
**To assign these
DNs to DSM16 or
DSM 16+
To assign these DNs to
DSM 32 or DSM 32+
1
2
3
4
5
6
on on on on on on
on on on on on off
on on on on off on
on on on on off off
on on on off on on
on on on off on off
2
3
221-236
237-252
253-268
269-284
285-300
301-316
221-252 (DS30 2 and 3)
237-268 (DS30 3 and 4)
253-284) (DS30 4 and 5)
269-300 (DS30 5 and 6)
285-316 (DS30 6 and 7)
N/A
4
5
6
***7
**The extensions listed are based on a three-digit DN with a Start DN of 221. If your system has longer DNs or a
different Start DN, enter the range in the blank column.
***If your system is configured with a 3/5 DS30 split, you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module. You cannot
configure the DSM 32 module for DS30 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed.
DSM16+ and DSM 32+ double density switch settings (upgraded system)
The following table shows the switch settings for DSM-plus modules deployed as double density
on a system that has been upgraded from BCM 2.5 to BCM 3.0 or later software.
Note: DSM modules deployed with BCM 2.5 systems are all single density and cannot be
set to double density. The DSM 16+ and DSM32+ modules can be set to either density.
Table 43 DSM 16+ and DSM32+ double density switch settings (upgraded system)
Select
DS30
bus
*To assign these DNs
to DSM 16+:
(A= DSM1, B=DSM2)
To assign these DNs to
DSM 32+
(connectors: A=top, B = bottom)
Enter these switch settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on on on
on on on
on on off
on on off
on off on
on off on
on off off
on off off
off on on
off on on
off on off
off on off
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
221-236
377-392
237-252
393-408
253-268
409-424
269-284
425-440
285-300
441-456
301-316
457-472
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
377-392
221-236
393-408
237-252
409-424
253-268
425-440
269-284
441-456
285-300
457-472
301-316
2
3
4
5
6
**7
* The extensions listed are based on a three-digit DN with a Start DN of 221. If your system has longer DNs or a
different Start DN, enter the range in the blank column.
** If your system is configured with a 3/5 split, you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
DSM16/DSM 32 single density switch settings (new system)
The following table shows the switch settings for DSM modules deployed as single density on a
new system running BCM 3.0 or later software.
Note: DSM modules deployed prior to BCM 3.0 are all single density and cannot be set to
double density, but they can still be used on new systems. The DSM 16+ and DSM32+
modules can be set to either density.
Table 44 DSM16/DSM16+ and DSM32/DSM32+ single density switch settings (new system)
To assign these DNs to
DSM 32 or
Enter these switch
settings
Select
DS30
bus
*To assign these DNs to
DSM 16 or DSM 16+
DSM 32+
1
2
3
4
5
6
Top
253-268 221-236
285-300 253-268
Bottom
on on
on on
on on
on on
on on
on on
on on on on
on on on off
on on off on
on on off off
on off on on
on off on off
2
3
221-236
253-268
285-300
317-332
349-364
381-396
4
317-332 285-300
349-364 317-332
5
6
381-396
349-364
**7
N/A
* The extensions listed are based on a three-digit DN with a Start DN of 221. If your system has longer DNs or a
different Start DN, enter the range in the blank column.
**If your system is configured with a 3/5 split, you cannot use DS30 7 for the DSM 16 module. You cannot configure
the DSM32 module for DS30 6 because the second set of DNs cannot be accessed.
DSM16+ and DSM 32+ double density switch settings (new system)
The following table shows the switch settings for DSM-plus modules deployed as double density
on a new system (BCM 3.0 or later software).
Note: DSM modules deployed prior to BCM 3.0 are all single density and cannot be set to
double density, but they can still be used on new systems. The DSM 16+ and DSM32+
modules can be set to either density.
Table 45 DSM 16+ and DSM32+ double density switch settings (new system) (Sheet 1 of 2)
To assign these
To assign these DNs to
DSM 32+ (connectors:
A=top, B = bottom)
Enter these switch settings
Select
DS30 bus
DNs
to DSM 16+:
A= DSM1, B=DSM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
on
off
on on on
on on on
on on off
on on off
on off on
on off on
A
B
A
B
A
B
221-236
237-252
253-268
269-284
285-300
301-316
A
B
A
B
A
B
237-252
221-236
269-284
253-268
301-316
285-300
2
3
4
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 133
Table 45 DSM 16+ and DSM32+ double density switch settings (new system) (Sheet 2 of 2)
off
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
on
off
on off off
on off off
off on on
off on on
off on off
off on off
A
B
A
B
A
B
317-332
333-348
349-364
365-380
381-396
397-412
A
B
A
B
A
B
333-348
365-380
397-412
5
6
317-332
349-364
381-396
**7
* The extensions listed are based on a three-digit DN with a Start DN of 221. If your system has longer DNs or a
different Start DN, enter the range in the blank column.
** If your system is configured with a 3/5 split, you cannot use DS30 7.
FEM switch settings
The DIP switches on the underside of the FEM are used to turn the six ports on the front of the
module on or off. You need to turn a port on for each Norstar expansion module you want to
connect to the BCM system. Each port also occupies one full DS30 bus. Therefore, if you have a
fully configured, six-module Norstar system to convert, you must turn on all six ports on the FEM,
and, therefore, no other module can be installed in the BCM system.
Note: The FEM module only supports connections to the Norstar trunk and station
expansion modules.
For example, if you want to use fiber port 2, turn on DIP switch 2 (DS30 3). After the module is
installed, an LED lights beside each active fiber port.
Table 46 shows the switch for each fiber port.
Table 46 FEM switch settings
Set this switch to turn on the port
Choose a port
to turn on
This DS30 bus is
assigned
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
2
3
ON
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7*
* If your system is configured with a 3/5 split, DS30 7 is not available.
Note: If you turn on all six switches, you are using all the DS30 numbers. In this case, the
BCM system can support only the FEM module. All other media bays must be empty.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
Warning: Do not attempt to turn on ports requiring a DS30 bus that is already in service
to another media bay module located on the same BCM system. Doing this results in
unpredictable behavior with both modules.
BCM400 expansion gateway MBMs
MBMs are installed in the BCM400 expansion gateway in the same manner as in the BCM400
using the expansion gateway.
The following rules apply when using a BCM400 expansion gateway:
•
•
All stations must be on the host unit.
Primary rate interface (PRI) PSTN trunking interfaces must be on the expansion gateway.
If analog modems are deployed as part of the overall customer configuration and intended to share
PSTN network access with the normal voice trunks, then an exception to the above rules is
required. In this case, analog stations (for example, ASM8+, GASM8, or even ATAs connected to
a DSM16/32) must be configured in the expansion gateway to support the modem connections
only. Fax machines or other analog telephones must be connected to MBMs on the host system.
Figure 72 BCM400 expansion gateway configuration
DTM
DTM
Example 1
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
System needs:
16 analog trunks
32 analog phones
128 digital phones
10 IP Phones
BCM400 expansion gateway
ASM8
CTM8
ASM8
ASM8
CTM8
ASM8
BCM400 main unit
and expansion unit
DTM
DTM
Example 2
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
System needs:
32 analog phones
160 digital phones
10 IP Phones
BCM400 expansion gateway
ASM8
ASM8
DSM32
ASM8
ASM8
BCM400 main unit
and expansion unit
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM) 135
Figure 73 BCM400 expansion gateway configuration
DTM
DTM
Example 3
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
System needs:
16 analog trunks
160 digital phones
10 IP Phones
BCM400 expansion gateway
DSM32
CTM8
48 digital trunks
CTM8
BCM400 main unit
and expansion unit
DTM
DTM
CTM4
Example 4
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
DSM32
System needs:
192 digital phones
10 IP Phones
48 digital trunks
BCM400 expansion gateway
DSM32
DSM32
BCM400 main unit
and expansion unit
Warning: Ensure you are properly grounded before handling modules or any
components that are part of the BCM hardware.
Installing an MBM
After you set the switches on the MBMs, you can install them in the BCM main unit or the
expansion unit.
The BCM200 main unit accommodates a maximum of two MBMs. The BCM400 main unit
accommodates a maximum of four MBMs. If your BCM400 system requires more than four
MBMs, you must connect an expansion unit to the BCM main unit.
Warning: Install DTMs in the BCM main unit only. DTMs do not function if
installed in the BCM expansion unit.
If there are no empty MBM bays in the BCM main unit, move MBMs to the
expansion unit to provide space for the DTMs.
Note: The number of MBMs you can add varies, depending on the DS30
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 Chapter 8 Installing a media bay module (MBM)
To install an MBM in the BCM main unit or expansion unit
1
Ensure that the switches on the MBM are set correctly. For information about how to set the
modules, the switches activate the front ports. Ensure that the switches accurately reflect the
2
3
4
Select an open media bay.
With the face of the MBM facing toward you, insert the MBM into the open bay.
Push the MBM completely into the unit. You will hear a click when the MBM is firmly seated
in the media bay.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each MBM you want to install.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 137
Chapter 9
Connecting the cables
This section describes initial system startup procedures for the BCM system and contains the
following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The BCM main unit and expansion unit are each powered through an AC outlet. The voltage
required depends on the geographical location of the units.
All systems are initially set at the factory, based on the intended destination. You must check that
the voltage and wiring are correct for your system before you connect any of the units to the power
source. Incorrect power settings result in equipment damage.
Read the following warnings. You must protect yourself and the BCM system from possible
electrical shocks.
Warning: Use only qualified persons to service the system
The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the
appropriate training and experience. Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of
working with telephony equipment and wiring. They must have experience in techniques
that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage.
Danger: Electrical shock hazards
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and AC mains are possible
with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM system
must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire ground. In addition, all unused slots must
have blank faceplates installed. The covers on all units must be in place at the completion
of any servicing.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Warning: Leakage currents
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming
available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines.
These leakage currents normally safely flow to protective earth ground through the power
cord.
System shutdown: You must disconnect the media bay module cables from the system
before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.
System startup: You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before
reconnecting the cables to the media bay modules.
Connecting power to the BCM system
The BCM system is available in North American and International versions. Ensure that the power
supply is correct for your location. The BCM200 and BCM400 systems have standard power
supplies and redundant power supplies that adjust automatically to the required voltage.
Follow this procedure to check the voltage and wiring, and to power up the system.
To connect power and wiring
1
Check all wiring before connecting power to the BCM units.
Warning: Connecting power
Always connect power to the BCM main unit and expansion unit before you reconnect the
cabling to the front of the units.
2
3
Connect the BCM main unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non-switchable,
third-wire ground AC outlet.
If you use a power bar, plug the power cords into the power bar and connect the power bar to
the AC outlet.
Connect the BCM expansion unit power cord to an electrical outlet that is a non-switchable,
third-wire ground AC outlet.
Danger: Do not fasten power supply cords
Do not fasten the BCM main unit or expansion unit power supply cords to any building
surface.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 139
Checking system power and status
After you connect power to the BCM system, the power LED on the front of the base function tray
and expansion unit lights. Once the system services have reactivated, the status LED turns solid
green. For further information on LED indicators, see “Viewing the BCM system LEDs” on page
77.
The power LED can indicate RED if the system is in standby mode whereby power is available but
shut down by the operating system or Overtemp.
LEDs in position 3 to 8 will flash when the SSM is not communicating (during startup, shutdown,
or operating system hang).
Note: During system initialization, the system performs diagnostics on the hardware
configuration size and installation. If the power fails, system data remains in memory.
To check system power and status
1
If the base function tray power LED does not light:
a
b
c
Disconnect the power cords.
Check all cables and power connections. Ensure that the AC outlet has power.
Reconnect the power cords.
2
3
If the power LED is red and there is no power, use a paper clip to select the reset button.
Alternatively, power cycle the system to restart.
You are now ready to connect the system to the network and initialize it.
Note: You can monitor the state of the BCM system LEDs from your computer.
When the system power is on, and the system has successfully booted, the power and status LEDs
status LED states.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Figure 74 Module power and status LEDs
All modules have a
power
and
status
LED
DSM16
Table 47 Module power and status LED states
LED
Label
Description
Green LED On
Green LED Flash
Red LED On (Only)
Green LED Off
Indicates state OK
of system
power
Check for hardware A minimum of 1 power No power to the
problem with fan,
power, or heat
inside housing
supply needs attention module
Indicates
condition of
system status
All monitored
services are
functioning
In startup/shutdown N/A
mode
Not all services are
working, MSC may
not have started
correctly
check for problem
with MSC wiring
Wiring the MBMs
This section describes how to wire the cables that connect to the station and trunk MBMs.
•
The station MBMs have one or two 50-pin amphenol connectors that require 25-pair cables to
connect the MBMs to the equipment in the telephone room where your demarcation point is
located. Use a qualified technical professional to ensure the cable wiring and your interior
telephone wiring are correct.
•
The trunk MBMs connect to central office trunks using RJ-type jacks. However, the GATM4
and GATM8 have a 50-pin amphenol connector that requires a 25-pair cable to connect to the
Central Office (CO) trunk. These cables can be supplied by qualified technical personnel to
ensure the correct pin-out.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 141
Warning: Qualified persons to service the system
The installation and service of this unit must be performed by service personnel with the
appropriate training and experience. Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of
working with telephony equipment and wiring. They must have experience in techniques
that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage.
Warning: Leakage currents
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming
available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines. These
leakage currents normally safely flow to protective earth ground through the power cord.
However, if the ac power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the front of
the base function tray, this hazard can occur.
System shutdown: You must disconnect the MBM cables from the system before
disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.
System startup: You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before
reconnecting the cables to the MBMs.
Danger: Electrical shock hazards
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and ac mains are possible
with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM system
must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire ground. In addition, all unused slots must
have blank faceplates installed. The covers on all units must be in place at the completion
of any servicing.
Warning: Electrical shock warning
The BCM MBMs have been safety approved for installation into BCM main units and
expansion units. It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation
of the BCM hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals.
BEFORE YOU OPEN the BCM main unit or expansion unit, ensure that the network
cables are unplugged and the unit is then disconnected from the AC power source.
Station MBMs: The ports on these MBMs are meant to be connected only to approved
digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal wiring
system.
Do not connect any telephones to wiring that runs outside of the building.
Read and follow the installation instructions carefully.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Connect the MBMs to service providers
To connect DTM, CTM, CTM8, BRIM S/T, or 4x16 MBMs
1
On the front of the MBM, locate the RJ-48C jack (DTM), RJ-45 jack (BRIM), or the RJ-11
jacks (CTM and 4x16).
2
Wire one end of the cable to the demarcation blocks of the building.
Figure 75 shows the wiring pin-outs for a DTM to connect to a service provider.
Figure 75 DTM RJ-48C wiring array
DTM connector
To network
To plug
Receive from
network
1- Rring
2 - Rtip
RJ-48C jack
3 - Rshield
Transmit to network
4-Tring
5-Ttip
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6-Tshield
Warning: If you are using a service provider channel service unit (CSU), you must
disable the BCM system internal CSU.
Figure 76 shows the wiring pin-out for a CTM4, a CTM8, or the CTM jacks on a 4x16 MBM
to connect to the service provider.
All the MBMs have an auxiliary jack (the CTM8 has two). Do not attempt to plug digital
equipment into this jack.
Figure 76 CTM RJ-11 wiring array
Auxiliary jack
CTM
connector
Pin #/connection
3- Ring
4 - Tip
RJ-11 jacks
The CTM8 has ten RJ-11 jacks, including two
auxiliary jacks.
6 5 4 3 2 1
The 4x16 and CTM4 MBMs have four RJ-11 jacks.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 143
Figure 77 shows the wiring pin-out for a BRIM S/T to the service provider. This diagram also
applies to an S-Loop BRI and is capable of having S-Loop devices connected to it (video
phones, terminal adapters, group 3 fax machines). The T setting on the BRI Loop is used when
connected to the CO or PSTN.
Warning: The BRIM S/T must only be connected to an NT1 provided by the service
provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV) to
Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Figure 77 BRIM S/T RJ-45 wiring array
BRIM S/T connector
Pin #/connection
System side
1 not used
2 not used
3 +Rx
+Tx
+Rx
-Rx
-Tx
4 +Tx
RJ-45 jacks
5 -Tx
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 -Rx
7 not used
8 not used
3
4
Insert the connector into the jack on the MBM.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide for steps about changing the default settings for
each line or loop.
You can now use Element Manager to configure the lines or sets associated with the MBM
(see the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide).
To connect the GATM
1
2
On the front of the MBM, locate the amphenol connector.
Wire one end of the cable to the demarcation blocks of the building.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Figure 78 on page 144 shows the wiring pin-outs for a GATM to connect to a service provider.
Figure 78 GATM pin-outs
GATM
Line
Pin
Wire color
module
26
1
White-Blue
1
Both
Both
Blue-White
1 R
2R
Line 1
Line 2
26 T
27T
27
2
White-Orange
Orange-White
2
3R
4R
28T
29T
28/3
29/4
No
connection
Line 3
Line 4
5R
6R
30T
31T
30
5
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
3
4
Both
Both
7R
8R
9R
32T
33T
31
6
Line 5
Line 6
34T
35T
36T
Blue-Red
10R
11R
12R
32/7
33/8
No
connection
37T
38T
39T
Line 7
Line 8
13R
14R
15R
16R
17R
18R
19R
20R
34
9
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
5
6
GATM8
GATM8
40T
41T
35
10
42T
43T
44T
45T
36/11
37/12
No
connection
38
13
39
14
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
7
8
GATM8
GATM8
21R
22R
23R
46T
47T
48T
24R
25R
49T
50T
No
connection
40/15 to
49/24
AUX
50
25
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
Aux
Both
Wiring MBMs to internal connections
After you wire the trunk MBMs, you can install the wiring to the station MBMs. These are the
MBMs that connect to the internal telephone sets.
All station MBM wiring uses 25-pair cable with a female amphenol connector at the MBM end.
Note: DSM 32 MBMs require two 25-pair cables.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 145
To connect the DSM16+, DSM32+, ASM8, GASM8, or 4x16 MBMs
1
Wire 16 wire pairs from the amphenol connector to the local connecting blocks so they
connect to the 16 station sets you want connected to this MBM.
Note: Use 16 wire pairs from each connector for the DSM 32.
Table 48 provides the wiring scheme for the DSM16+, 4x16, and DSM32+ MBMs. The sets
heading indicates the set numbering for each of the amphenol pairs. Set DNs are allocated by
the BCM system based on the DS30 bus setting on the station MBM.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Table 48 DSM wiring chart
Pin
Wire color
Port 1Set #
2Set #
Wiring for DSM 16/16+, 4x16, DSM 32/32+
26
1
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
X01
X01
X02
X02
X03
X03
X04
X04
X05
X05
X06
X06
X07
X07
X08
X08
X09
X09
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
25-pair connector
27
2
1 R
2R
T=Tip
R=Ring
26 T
27T
28
3
3R
4R
28T
29T
29
4
DSM 16, 4x16
5R
6R
30T
31T
30
5
7R
8R
9R
32T
33T
31
6
34T
35T
36T
Blue-Red
10R
11R
12R
32
7
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
37T
38T
39T
13R
14R
15R
16R
33
8
40T
41T
34
9
DSM 32
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
X10 10
X10 10
X11 11
X11 11
X12 12
X12 12
X13 13
X13 13
X14 14
X14 14
X15 15
X15 15
X16 16
X16 16
The second 25-pair connector is
wired in the same sequence as the
first one.
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
1 Single connector, or bottom connector on DSM 32/32+
modules.
2 Upper connector on DSM 32/32+ modules.
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
42-40 no connections
17-25
Table 49 provides the wiring scheme for the eight pairs that connect to the ASM.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 147
Table 49 ASM wiring chart
Pin
Wire color
Port
Set #
Wiring for an ASM 8 or GASM8
26
1
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
X01
X01
X02
X02
X03
X03
X04
X04
X05
X05
X06
X06
X07
X07
X08
X08
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
27
2
25-pair
female
28
3
8T
33R
5T
amphenol
connector
2T
7T
32R
4T
3T
28R
1T
26R
6T
31R
30R
29R
27R
29
4
WARNING: Ensure that you have Tip (T) and Ring (R)
connected to the appropriate pins.
30
5
31
6
Blue-Red
32
7
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
no connection
33
8
34-50
9-25
relationship between the DS30 channel number and the DNs. Configuration information is
included in the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide.
2
Install the telephones and peripheral equipment (if it is a new system):
a
b
Attach the cables for the telephones to the connecting blocks.
3
4
Plug the female amphenol connector into the interface on the front of the MBM.
Set up any mobile system you are using.
•
Ensure the base stations are correctly installed and connected to the appropriate MBMs on
the BCM system. In the case of the Wireless LAN IP telephone system, ensure that the
access point is correctly set up to connect to the BCM system LAN or WAN.
•
Configure and register the handsets according to the instructions provided for each type of
system.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Wiring the FEM
A fiber expansion module (FEM) allows you to upgrade from a Norstar system to a BCM system
by reusing the Norstar MBMs. The MBMs connect to the FEM using the same fiber cable that
connected them to the Norstar fiber expansion card.
Warning: Handling optical fiber cables
If the cable is too long, ensure that it is coiled correctly using the fiber spool. Coil excess
fiber cable carefully around the spool provided. Do not bend the cable around any tight
corners. Bends in the fiber cable must not be less than 100 mm in diameter. Place the fiber
cable spool into a slot at the back of the cable trough in the Norstar MBM.
To connect the fiber cables
1
2
Ensure the BCM system is powered up and functional.
Connect the fiber cables from the Norstar MBMs to the jacks on the FEM.
Note: The DIP switch settings you chose determine which FEM ports are available. If you
enable all six FEM ports, the BCM system has no more DS30 resources available.
Therefore, you cannot connect more MBMs to the system.
a
b
Connect the Norstar Line Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 1.
Connect Norstar Extension Modules to the FEM beginning at fiber port 6.
3
Change the DN records in Element Manager or change the set wiring, as required, to match
your system.
Warning: When you connect a Norstar station MBM to an FEM, the extension numbers
of the telephones connected to the station MBM may change. To keep the same extension
numbers, you must change the DNs of the telephones or change the telephone wiring to
correspond with the required DNs.
Note: If you connect a Norstar station MBM amphenol cable directly to a DSM, you do
not have to modify the wiring connections. Ensure you select the correct DS30 number.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 149
Table 50 compares the designated extension numbers on the Norstar and on the BCM systems.
Table 50 Extension comparison chart
Ports
DS30 bus 2, FEM port 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Norstar
BCM
221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236
225 226 227 228 221 222 223 224 233 234 235 236 229 230 231 232
DS30 bus 3, FEM port 2
Norstar
BCM
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252
241 242 243 244 237 238 239 240 249 250 251 252 245 246 247 248
DS30 bus 4, FEM port 3
Norstar
BCM
253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268
257 258 259 260 253 254 255 256 265 266 267 268 261 262 263 264
DS30 bus 5, FEM port 4
Norstar
BCM
269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284
273 274 275 276 269 270 271 272 281 282 283 284 277 278 279 280
DS30 bus 6, FEM port 5
Norstar
BCM
285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300
289 290 291 292 285 286 287 288 297 298 299 300 293 294 295 296
DS30 bus 7, FEM port 6
Norstar
BCM
301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316
305 306 307 308 301 302 303 304 313 314 315 316 309 310 311 312
Setting DNs and port numbers
The MBM, based on the switch settings, defines which DNs and port numbers can be populated
the DNs and ports for your sets. If you are using the default start DN (221), a completed chart is
Table 51 Cross-referencing ports and DNs (Sheet 1 of 2)
DS30 bus
2
DS30 bus
3
DS30 bus
4
DS30 bus
5
DS30 bus
6
DS30 bus
7
Pin
Wire color
26
1
White-Blue DN
Port 201
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 301
Port 401
Port 501
Port 601
Port 701
Blue-White
27 White-Orange DN
Port 202
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 302
Port 402
Port 502
Port 602
Port 702
2
Orange-White
28 White-Green DN
Port 203
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 303
Port 403
Port 503
Port 603
Port 703
3
Green-White
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Table 51 Cross-referencing ports and DNs (Sheet 2 of 2)
DS30 bus
2
DS30 bus
3
DS30 bus
4
DS30 bus
5
DS30 bus
6
DS30 bus
7
Pin
Wire color
29 White-Brown DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 204
Port 304
Port 404
Port 504
Port 604
Port 704
4
30
5
Brown-White
White-Slate DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 205
Port 305
Port 405
Port 505
Port 605
Port 705
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
31
6
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 206
Port 306
Port 406
Port 506
Port 606
Port 706
32 Red-Orange DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 207
Port 307
Port 407
Port 507
Port 607
Port 707
7
Orange-Red
33
8
Red-Green DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 208
Port 308
Port 408
Port 508
Port 608
Port 708
Green-Red
34
9
Red-Brown DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 209
Port 309
Port 409
Port 509
Port 609
Port 709
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
35
10
36
11
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 210
Port 310
Port 410
Port 510
Port 610
Port 710
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 211
Port 311
Port 411
Port 511
Port 611
Port 711
37 Black-Orange DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 212
Port 312
Port 412
Port 512
Port 612
Port 712
12 Orange-Black
38 Black-Green DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 213
Port 313
Port 413
Port 513
Port 613
Port 713
13 Green-Black
39 Black-Brown DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 214
Black-Slate DN
Port 215
Yellow-Blue DN
Port 216
Port 314
Port 414
Port 514
Port 614
Port 714
14 Brown-Black
40
15
41
16
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 315
Port 415
Port 515
Port 615
Port 715
Slate-Black
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
Port 316
Port 416
Port 516
Port 616
Port 716
Blue-Yellow
MBM combinations
This section describes some combinations of trunk and station MBMs to demonstrate how to fit
the MBMs into the DS30 resources. These configurations are meant to help demonstrate how your
system can be configured using the information in this guide and do not necessarily reflect real-life
configurations.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 151
Combining CTMs/GATMs and 4x16s
The 4x16 combination MBM is a combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16. A maximum of four
CTM4s/GATM4s can fit into a DS30 bus when each is given a different offset. Therefore, you can
combine a maximum of three CTM4s/GATM4s with a 4x16 MBM. This configuration would
occupy two full DS30 buses.
You can install a maximum of three of the above combinations in a BCM system with an
including the switch settings for each MBM.
Table 52 CTMs/GATMs combined with 4x16 MBMs
Each heavily-outlined and shaded square represents
one module
Switch setting
2
4
1
DS30 #
2
4x16s
offset 3
CTM4s/GATM4s
offset 0, 1 and 2
CTM8/GATM8
offset 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
CTM/GATM settings: on on on on on on
CTM/GATM settings: on on off on on on
CTM/GATM settings: on off on on on on
1
2
3
Switch settings for 4x16:
on off off on on on
3
4
5
0
CTM/GATM settings: on on on on off on
2
on on off on off on
on off on on off on
on off off on off on
3
Switch settings for 4x16:
Fully-loaded setup
This section describes a system containing one DSM 32/32+, one DSM 16/16+, two ASM 8s, and
two DTMs. This configuration uses all the DS30 buses, with the exception of two offsets.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Table 53 demonstrates this combination, including the switch settings for each MBM.
Table 53 DSM combined with 2 DTMs and 2 ASMs
Each heavily-outlined and shaded square represents one
module
Switch setting
2
DS30
1
1
ASM8s/
GASM8
offset 0 and 1
2
channel DSM32/32+
DSM16/16+
offset 0
DTMs
offset 0
#
2
offset 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
DSM 32 settings:
on on on on on on
3
4
5
6
7
0
DSM 16 settings:
on on on on off on
0
1
ASM 8 settings: on on on on off off
ASM 8 settings: on on off on off off
0
0
on on on off on on
on on on off on off
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 153
Table 54 demonstrates either a double-density system.
Table 54 All station MBMs set for double density
Each heavily-outlined and shaded square represents one
module
Switch setting
2
DS30
channel
#
1
1
ASM8s/
GASM8
offset 0 and 1
2
DSM32+
offset 0
DSM16+
offset 0
DTMs
offset 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
DSM 32+ settings:
off on on on on on
DSM 32+ settings:
off on on on on off
0
0
DSM 16+ settings:
off on on on off on
off on off on off on
DSM 16+ settings:
0
1
0
1
ASM 8 settings: on on on on off on
ASM 8 settings: on on off on off on
ASM 8 settings: on off on on off on
ASM 8 settings: on off off on off on
0
on on on off on on
0
on on on off on off
DECT combinations
This section describes a system containing a DECT MBM, three BRIM MBMs, and two DSM 32s.
This configuration uses all the DS30 channels, with the exception of one offset.
Table 55 demonstrates this combination, including the switch settings for each MBM.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Table 55 Three BRI modules, two DSM 32s, and one DECT module
Each heavily-outlined and shaded square
represents one module
Switch setting
1
3
BRI
2
DS30
DECT
offset 0
DSM32s
offset 0
channel #
offset 0, 1 and 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
on on on on on on
on on on on off on
on on off on on on
0
0
DECT switch settings:
0
1
2
BRI settings on on on off on off
BRI settings on on off off on off
BRI settings on off on off on off
Changing configurations
Here are some points to consider when changing modules in existing or new BCM systems:
•
•
Trunk and analog station MBMs cannot share a DS30 bus.
MBMs that require more than one DS30 bus automatically assign the next bus in
chronological order. Therefore, if an existing installed MBM uses either of the required DS30
buses, remove the installed MBM. You must then assign the DIP switches for both MBMs so
there is no conflict between them or with any other installed MBM.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 155
•
•
The goal is to have a balanced mix of trunk and station MBMs.
Write the DIP switch settings for each module in a place that is handy to reference when you
decide to change or add MBMs.
•
If you update your Norstar system to a BCM system, your station amphenol connectors can be
connected into the MBMs without adjustment. Trunk connectors must be converted to RJ-11
(CTM) or RJ-45 (BRI) connectors. However, if you use the FEM to connect your Norstar
MBMs to the BCM system, the station wiring must be adjusted. Refer to “Wiring the FEM” on
System setup
future reference.
Table 56 System setup summary
DS30 bus 2
DS30 bus 3
DS30 bus 4
Media bay module
Dip switch setting
Line/set type
Line/Loop/DN range
DS30 bus 5
DS30 bus 6
DS30 bus 7
Media bay module
Dip switch setting
Line/set type
Line/Loop/DN range
Connecting the data networking hardware
This section describes how to connect network cards to the BCM system.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Warning: Check with your network administrator before you connect the BCM system
to the network to ensure there are no IP address conflicts.
The default address for the BCM system is:
•
•
IP address:10.10.10.1
Subnet: 255.255.255.0
If the default IP address will create a network conflict, you must change the IP address of
the BCM system before you connect any network connections.
To change the IP address outside of a network, you can use a computer and an Ethernet
crossover cable or a terminal and a null modem cable.
serial port” on page 179 for detailed instructions about connecting to the BCM system.
Connecting the cards
The data networking hardware (MSC) is installed in the BCM main unit at the factory. All systems
have dual embedded Ethernet interfaces. Some models come with an embedded V.92 modem.
field-installed WAN card.
Figure 79 Main unit ports and connectors
RJ-48C
port
DB26 connector
(female)
WAN card (field
upgrade) North
America version
shown
Media services card
(BCM200 version)
Modem port (North
America only)
Ethernet
ports
USB
ports
COM
port
Note: Your system may not have all the cards indicated.
Warning: Do not plug the WAN or modem cables into the system unless it is running.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 157
To connect the BCM system to the WAN
1
2
Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable.
Do one of the following:
•
To connect the WAN card using the RJ-48C connector, insert the wide area network
•
To connect the WAN card using the DB26 connector, use an adapter cable to connect the
wide area network (WAN) cable to the DB26 connector on the WAN card. These adapter
Table 57 shows the wire connections for a DB26 adapter cable.
Table 57 DB26 adapter cable
DB26 on
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
DB26 cable
WAN card
Signal
DB26 cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chassis Ground
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
18
19
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Transmit Clock
Receive Clock
Signal Ground/
Common Return
Data Terminal Ready 20
8
Data Carrier Detect
8
21
22
23
24
25
26
21
22
23
9
9
10
11
12
13
10
11
12
13
External Clock
24
25
To connect the modem
1
2
Ensure the system is powered up before connecting this cable.
Table 58 shows the wire connections for a RS-422/EIA 530 cable.
Table 58 RS-422/EIA 530 adapter cable (Sheet 1 of 2)
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
RS-422/EIA
530 cable
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
RS-422/EIA
530 cable
1
2
Protective Ground
Transmit Data A
1
2
14
15
Transmit Data B
Transmit Clock A
14
15
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
Table 58 RS-422/EIA 530 adapter cable (Sheet 2 of 2)
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
RS-422/EIA
530 cable
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
RS-422/EIA
530 cable
3
Receive Data A
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Receive Data B
16
17
18
19
4
Request to Send A
Clear to Send A
Receive Clock A
5
6
Data Set Ready A
Signal Ground
Request To Send B
7
Data Terminal Ready A 20
21
8
Data Carrier Detect A
Receive Clock B
9
Data Set Ready B
22
10
11
12
13
Data Carrier Detect B 10
Data Terminal Ready B 23
External Clock B
Transmit Clock B
Clear To Send B
11
12
13
External Clock A
24
25
Table 59 shows the wire connections for a V.35 adapter cable.
Table 59 V.35 adapter cable
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
DB26 on
WAN card Signal
V.35 cable
V.35 cable
1
Protective Ground
Transmit Data A
Receive Data A
Request to Send
Clear to Send
A
P
R
C
D
E
B
F
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Transmit Data B
S
Y
T
V
2
Transmit Clock A
Receive Data B
Receive Clock A
3
4
5
6
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
7
Data Terminal Ready H
8
Data Carrier Detect
Receive Clock B
9
X
10
11
12
13
External Clock B
Transmit Clock B
W
External Clock A
U
AA
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables 159
Table 60 shows the wire connections for a DB15 X.21 adapter cable.
Table 60 DB15 X.21 adapter cable
DB26 on
DB15
DB26 on
DB15
WAN card
Signal
X.21 cable
WAN card
Signal
X.21 cable
1
Chassis Ground
Transmit Data A
Receive Data A
Request to Send A
Clear to Send A
1
2
4
3
5
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Transmit Data B
9
2
3
Receive Data B
Receive Clock A
11
6
4
5
6
Request To Send B 10
7
Signal Ground
8
8
9
Receive Clock B
External Clock B
Clear To Send B
13
14
12
10
11
12
13
External Clock A
7
Installing the cards
installation process for these cards.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
Chapter 10
Installing telephones and peripherals
This section describes how to install telephones and peripherals.
You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system. Telephone
configuration is determined by which station media bay module (MBM) you are using.
The BCM system creates default settings for the telephone DN records when it is first initialized.
The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose. To change these settings, use
Element Manager. Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through Element
Manager are contained in the BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide.
Note: For detailed information on installing various telephones and peripherals,
refer to the documentation for your particular telephone or peripheral.
Note: Programming occurs on the telephone when the BCM system recognizes the
telephone on the system.
Refer to the following sections for information on installing telephones and peripherals:
•
•
•
•
System telephones
The BCM system supports a number of analog, digital, IP telephony, and cordless telephones.
Analog telephones are supported either through the analog station ports on the main unit or analog
station MBMs (ASM), or by connecting to a digital module through an analog terminal adapter 2
(ATA2).
Documentation describing installation and telephone features is supplied with each piece of
equipment.
Analog terminal adapter 2
The analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) connects a standard analog voice device or data
communication device to a digital station connector on the BCM system.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals
procedure for installing the device.
Central Answering Position (CAP/eCAP)
A Central Answering Position (CAP) provides additional auto-dial positions or additional line
appearances.
A 7316E telephone can support up to 9 OKIMs. Each module provides 24 programmable keys
with indicators. A telephone can be configured as an eCAP, which allows it to support line
appearances on the KIM buttons. If the telephone is configured as an eCAP, a maximum of four
KIMs can be added (eKIMs). A T7316E/KIM configuration that is not configured as an eCAP can
support up to nine KIMs. In this configuration, only memory button programming is supported. A
supplementary power supply is required after the fifth KIM is added.
Note: Programming
The T7316E+eKIM does not support auto-dial keys programmed with Hunt group
DNs.
Refer to the CAP user card for instructions about using a CAP. For more information, refer to the
BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide.
Telephone port and DN cross-reference
The media bay module that analog and digital telephones connect to dictates DNs and port
reference, put a check mark beside the ports where there are telephones installed.
Note: The following table is based on a system with three-digit DNs and a start DN of
221. If your system has longer DNs, the system automatically adds a repeat of the first
digit for each additional DN length unit; for example, 221 becomes 2221.
Also, note on the following tables that DN numbering differs between systems that were
upgraded from BCM 2.5 software and systems that were new with BCM 3.0 or newer
software.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals 163
Table 61 Cross-referencing ports and DNs on a 2.5 system upgraded to 3.0 or newer software
DS 30
bus 02
DNs
DS 30
bus 03
DNs
DS 30
bus 04
DNs
DS 30
bus 05
DNs
DS 30
bus 06
DNs
DS 30
bus 07
DNs
Pins Port*
26/1
27/2
28/3
29/4
30/5
31/6
32/7
33/8
34/9
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
35/10 X10
36/11 X11
37/12 X12
38/13 X13
39/14 X14
40/15 X15
41/16 X16
Second-level DNs (DS 30 bus set to Double Density)
Pins
Port*
DS 30
bus 02
DNs
DS 30
bus 03
DNs
DS 30
bus 04
DNs
DS 30
bus 05
DNs
DS 30
bus 06
DNs
DS 30
bus 07
DNs
26/1
27/2
28/3
29/4
30/5
31/6
32/7
33/8
34/9
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
35/10 X26
36/11 X27
37/12 X28
38/13 X29
39/14 X30
40/15 X31
41/16 X32
* For each port, substitute the X for the DS30 bus number. Example: Port X01 on DS30 bus 02 is port 0201.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals
Table 62 Cross-referencing ports and DNs on a new version 3.0 or newer system
DS 30
bus 02
DNs
DS 30
bus 03
DNs
DS 30
bus 04
DNs
DS 30
bus 05
DNs
DS 30
bus 06
DNs
DS 30
bus 07
DNs
Pins Port*
26/1
27/2
28/3
29/4
30/5
31/6
32/7
33/8
34/9
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X09
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
35/10 X10
36/11 X11
37/12 X12
38/13 X13
39/14 X14
40/15 X15
41/16 X16
Second-level DNs (DS 30 bus set to Double Density)
Pins
Port*
DS 30
bus 02
DNs
DS 30
bus 03
DNs
DS 30
bus 04
DNs
DS 30
bus 05
DNs
DS 30
bus 06
DNs
DS 30
bus 07
DNs
26/1
27/2
28/3
29/4
30/5
31/6
32/7
33/8
34/9
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
35/10 X26
36/11 X27
37/12 X28
38/13 X29
39/14 X30
40/15 X31
41/16 X32
* For each port, substitute the X for the DS30 bus number. Example: Port X01 on DS30 bus 02 is port 0201.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals 165
Installing an emergency telephone
You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when there is no power to the BCM system.
To install an emergency telephone on the BCM system, connect a single line analog telephone to
the auxiliary port on the CTM/GATM. When you make a call from the emergency telephone, the
auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the line 1 port of the CTM/GATM.
Tip:You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your BCM
system.
To install the emergency telephone
1
2
Connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM.
Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the line 1 port of the CTM.
Installing IP Phones
The system can be set to automatically assign DNs to the Nortel IP Phones. If you choose to
manually assign DNs, choose DNs from unused DNs in the digital range. However, port numbers
are assigned from DS30 01 (ports 0101-0132) first; then from DS30 08, if there are ports available,
and DS30 07 if the system is running a 3/5 DS30 split. If no ports are available on those DS30
blocks, the system may assign digital set port numbers. Also ensure that you do not assign DNs
that are assigned to Call Center mailboxes (CDNs).
Installing the mobility systems
The radio-based mobility systems all have their own documentation that describes the hardware
and installation and activation of the handsets.
•
Digital Mobility system: The BCM main unit can support a maximum of two digital mobility
controllers (DMC), which act as the call processing unit between the BCM main unit and the
digital mobility base stations and handsets. The DMCs have a one-to-one connection with
digital ports on the BCM main unit.
For installation and configuration details, refer to the Digital Mobility Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Installing T7406 cordless systems
The T7406 cordless system consists of a base station that connects up to three digital station ports
on the BCM system, providing a radio interface for three cordless handsets. The cordless handsets
register to the base station, which transfers the call over the telephone lines connected to the
system. The handsets are configured to emulate the T7316/M7310 telephone features. This system
is most suited for small to medium-sized office environments that are set up in an open fashion.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals
T7406 cordless telephones use the DNs for the ports on the station module that is connected to the
base station. They are digital sets and use M7310/T7316 as an operational model.
Moving telephones
You can move a BCM digital telephone to a new location within the system without losing its
programmed settings, if the telephone has been enabled with Set relocation (automatic telephone
relocation). When you enable Set relocation, the internal numbers, auto-dial settings, and personal
speed dial codes remain with the telephone when you disconnect the telephone.
If you connect a different telephone to the jack before you reconnect the moved telephone, the new
telephone takes the programmed settings. The BCM system can no longer identify the old
telephone.
After you plug a moved set into a new jack, the BCM system can take 45 seconds to identify the
telephone. Programming relocation takes 3 minutes to complete. Wait for this to occur before you
change any settings for the telephone in the system.
Warning: If you disconnect a relocated telephone before the relocation programming is
complete, the telephone can lose the programmed settings.
I
Note: Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default.
For IP telephones to retain DN-specific features, the Keep DN Alive setting for the telephone
programming must be selected.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
Chapter 11
Installing the analog terminal adapter
This section provides installation instructions for the analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) or ATA.
The ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the BCM
system through a digital station module. Examples of analog voice devices are analog telephones
and answering machines. Examples of analog data communication devices are modems and fax
machines.
The ATA2 is designated as either an ONS (on-premise station) or an OPS (off-premise station)
port.
Refer to the following sections for information on installing an ATA2:
•
•
•
Configuration overview
This section describes environment configurations for connecting analog and data devices to the
main unit using an ATA2:
•
•
Analog telephone
Figure 80 on page 168 shows an installation overview for connecting an analog device through an
ATA2 to the main unit.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter
Figure 80 Analog telephone installation overview
ATA 2 power cord
Analog telephone
BCM main unit
Central
Office
ATA 2
Terminal loop resistance:
1300 ohms maximum
Line loop resistance:
135 ohms maximum
Analog data device
The ATA2 connects a standard analog data device, such as a fax or modem, to the BCM system.
Figure 81 shows an installation overview for connecting a data communication device through an
ATA2 to the BCM system.
Figure 81 Data communication device installation overview
ATA 2 power cord
Data communication
BCM main unit
device
Central
Office
ATA 2
Terminal loop resistance:
200 ohms maximum
Line loop resistance:
135 ohms maximum
Installing the ATA2
This section provides information on installing the ATA2:
•
•
•
Connecting the ATA2
After the correct environment has been set up, connect the BCM system and the analog device to
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 169
Figure 82 ATA2 top view
24 ~
V
0.006 A
=
Line jack
Terminal jack
Power supply connector receptacle
Figure 83 shows the pin-outs for the connection cables.
Figure 83 ATA2 pin-outs
Line jack
Terminal jack
TCM*
TCM*
Ring (B-Lead)
Tip (A-Lead)
* The TCM input is not polarity sensitive.
To connect the ATA2
1
2
3
4
5
Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 terminal jack.
Connect the other end to your telephone, modem, or fax machine.
Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 line jack.
Connect the other end to an available station port on the BCM main unit or expansion unit.
For a 120 V or 230 V system, plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power
supply connector receptacle. Plug the adapter into a standard AC outlet.
Caution: In North America, the ATA2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that
is UL- and CSA-approved.
In Europe, the ATA2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked.
Mounting the ATA2
After the ATA2 is correctly connected, you can mount the unit on a wall, as described in this
section.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter
To mount the ATA2 on a wall
1
When using 0.5 mm wire (24 AWG), select a location within 800 m (2600 ft.) of the BCM
main unit.
2
3
Allow 12.5 cm (5 in.) clearance for the line jack, terminal jack, and power supply connector.
Screw two 4-mm (#8) screws into the wall, 130 mm (5 1/4 in.) away from each other. Leave
6 mm (1/4 in.) of the two screws showing.
4
Align the slots at the back of the ATA2 unit over the screws. Push the unit against the wall.
The line jack, terminal jack, and power supply connector must be at the top of the ATA2 (see
Figure 84 ATA2 back view
Mounting keyhole slots
Test insertion loss measurement
The maximum loss for ATA2 to Central Office (CO) configuration must not exceed 10 dB (see
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 171
Figure 85 Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone
ATA 2
BCM main unit
Analog telephone
Central Office
cable loss
Cable loss
BCM to ATA 2
ATA 2 to BCM
10 dB Max
50 dB
Longitudinal balance to ground
60 to 4,000 Hz
With IEEE 455-1976 test
Overload level
3 dB
Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and analog device by using standard dial-up test
lines with a transmission test set (for example, Hewlett-Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set).
To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device
1
Establish a connection to the 1 mW, 1 kHz, CO service line with an analog telephone attached
to the ATA2.
2
Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms:
•
•
Replace the analog telephone with the test set.
Use RECEIVE/600 OHM/HOLD mode on the test set.
3
Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog
telephone or the line drops.
4
5
Remove the single-line telephone.
Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port, which is where the analog loop ends
and where the analog device connects.
Note: The tone must be greater than - 10 dB (for example, - 9 dB is acceptable).
To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO
1
Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with an analog telephone
attached to the ATA2.
2
Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms:
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter
•
•
Replace the analog telephone with the test set.
Use TRANSMIT/600 OHM/HOLD mode on the test set.
3
Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog
telephone or the line drops.
4
5
Remove the analog telephone.
Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at - 10 dBm, and measure the level at the CO
exchange.
Note: The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB
(for example, 9 dB is acceptable).
Configuring the ATA2
Configure the ATA2 using Element Manager or Telset Administration. For detailed configuration
information, refer to the BCM 4.0 Device Configuration Guide.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
Chapter 12
Installing optional telephony equipment
Use the procedures described in this chapter to connect the optional ringer, page, and music
telephony equipment to the media services card (MSC) connectors. Locate and use the MSC
connectors on the front of the BCM base function tray.
This section describes the following main topics:
•
•
•
•
Installing an auxiliary ringer
An auxiliary ringer is a customer-supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing
capability to telephones on the BCM system.
To install an auxiliary ringer
1
2
3
Use the installation instructions that came with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary
ringer.
Connect the ringer generator miniature jack to the auxiliary ringer output on the MSC. Refer to
Select the appropriate option for your system:
•
If you are adding more auxiliary equipment, proceed to “Connecting the external paging
•
Figure 86 Auxiliary ringer jack
MSC faceplate
Ring - Auxiliary relay output
Auxiliary ringer
Tip - Auxiliary relay output
Sleeve - Ground
Warning: The auxiliary ringer must not be connected to exposed plant.
The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment
Activating auxiliary ringer programming
You can activate the auxiliary ringer by setting auxiliary ring for specific external lines and BCM
telephones.
Connecting the external paging system
You can connect a customer-supplied external paging system to provide paging over external
loudspeakers.
Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines:
•
•
The paging output from the MSC is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600
.
The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms, for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm.
There is no DC voltage across the page output terminals.
•
The page output uses the tip and ring terminals of the jack. The sleeve terminal of the jack
connects to ground. You must use a stereo plug to connect the page signal output.
When you use the page signal output jack to connect an external paging amplifier, you also use the
page relay jack, which contains a floating relay contact pair. The system uses this jack to control
the external paging amplifier.
•
The contact pair has a switch capacity of 50 mA (non-inductive) at 40 V (maximum). You
must remove any inductive load on the output.
•
The page relay contacts connect to the tip and ring terminals of the jack. The sleeve terminal of
the jack connects to ground. You must use a stereo plug to connect the page relay.
To install an external paging system
1
Use the installation instructions that came with the external paging hardware to install the
external paging system.
2
Figure 87 Audio input jack
Ring - Page signal
MSC faceplate
Page output
Tip - Page signal
Sleeve - Ground
3
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment 175
Figure 88 Page relay jack
Ring - Page relay output
MSC Faceplate
Page relay
Tip - Page relay output
Sleeve - Ground
Warning: The paging connections must not be connected to exposed plant.
Tip: Paging tips
BCM external paging does not support talk-back paging equipment unless you use an
external line port.
The BCM system provides paging over the telephone speakers when there is no external
paging equipment.
4
Select the appropriate option for your system:
•
If you are adding more auxiliary equipment, proceed to “Connecting an external music
•
Connecting an external music source
Use this procedure to connect an external music source to the BCM system. You can use any
customer-supplied, approved, low power device as a music source. A music source includes
equipment such as a radio with a high-impedance earphone jack.
Music-on-hold specifications
Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines:
•
•
Nominal input impedance is 3.3 kilohms.
Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is
-22 dBm0 for a 0.25 V rms input signal.
•
The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network
does not exceed -12 dBm when averaged over any 3-second interval.
•
•
The maximum non-clipped input level is 1 V rms.
The interface is protected against ringing cross.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 Chapter 12 Installing optional telephony equipment
To connect an external music source
1
Connect the miniature jack of the music source output to the music-on-hold input on the MSC.
Figure 89 Music-on-hold jack
Ring - No connection
MSC faceplate
Music-on-hold
input
Tip - Music signal
Sleeve - Ground
2
3
Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by activating Background Music
and adjusting the volume at the music source.
Tip: You can adjust the Background Music volume at every telephone.
Enable music for callers on hold and for background music through programming.
Next step
After you have connected the cables to the BCM system, you can configure the BCM system.
system.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Initializing the system 177
Chapter 13
Initializing the system
After you start the BCM system, you are ready to set the initial configuration parameters.
The initial configuration defines your BCM system to the network. It also gives the system a
unique identity and initial parameters. From that point, you can continue with the specific
configurations for your system, which are described in the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide and the
other user guides for each optional application you choose to add to your system.
Data parameter requirements
Obtain the following parameter values from an Internet service provider (ISP) or corporate
network administrator.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
initial IP address and netmask for each network interface
primary (and optional secondary) DNS servers
default next-hop router
fractional T1 channel numbers (if you are using fractional TI)
system name
WAN link protocol
frame relay DLCI/CIR (if applicable)
V.90 or V.92 modem settings (North America only)
Using the default BCM system IP address
All BCM systems are shipped with this default address:
•
•
IP address: 10.10.10.1
Subnet: 255.255.255.0
If you can use the default IP address, you can connect the BCM system to the LAN. This enables
you to configure the BCM system, through Element Manager, from any PC connected to the LAN.
You can also connect to the BCM system using an Ethernet crossover cable (see “Using the
Warning: Before using the default address on your network, check with your system
administrator. If this address conflicts with the LAN settings, you can cause network
damage if you connect to the network without changing the IP address.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 Chapter 13 Initializing the system
If you must change the IP address (due to a conflict with your network), connect to the BCM
address using Telset Administration.
Using the Ethernet crossover cable
You use an Ethernet crossover cable connected to a computer with a network card to connect your
computer to the LAN card in the BCM main unit. With this connection, you can use Element
Manager to configure the BCM system when you are unable to immediately connect your system
to the LAN card or your system does not have a network connection.
You use this type of connection in these situations:
•
•
•
The computer you are using does not have access to the BCM system through the network.
The BCM system is not connected to a LAN or WAN.
You have to change the IP address and netmask for the BCM system before you connect it to
the network.
Setting the crossover connections
To connect to the BCM system using an Ethernet crossover cable, you need a computer equipped
connections required.
Figure 90 Ethernet crossover cable
3TD+
6TD-
1RD+
2RD-
3TD+
6TD-
1RD+
2RD-
Connecting through Ethernet crossover cable
Use the following two procedures to connect the Ethernet crossover cable and configure your
computer to connect to the BCM system.
To connect the Ethernet crossover cable
1
2
3
Shut down the computer.
Attach one end of the Ethernet crossover cable to the LAN card on the BCM main unit.
Connect the other end of the cable to the network interface card on your computer.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Initializing the system 179
4
Start the computer.
To configure your computer
Note: The steps below may differ slightly depending on the operating system of your
computer. The task in this section is to specify the IP address and subnet mask for the
computer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
From the Start menu, choose Settings then choose Control Panel.
Double-click the Network icon.
Select your TCP/IP adapter, and then click the Properties button.
Click the IP Address tab.
Click the Specify an IP address option.
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the BCM system (if using the default IP
address, enter 10.10.10.2).
7
In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask of the BCM system (if using the default,
enter 255.255.255.0).
8
9
Click OK.
Click OK.
Your computer is now configured to connect to the BCM system.
Connecting through the serial port
You can also connect to the BCM system through the serial port using a null modem cable. You
can then change the IP address of the BCM system and perform other basic configuration tasks.
You can use Element Manager to perform more detailed configuration of your system.
You must use a null modem cable connection to the BCM main unit if the default IP address is not
compatible with your LAN or WAN network.
Required equipment:
•
•
null modem cable
VT100-compatible terminal or a computer that has a terminal program such as Hyperterminal
Warning: Your terminal must be VT100-compatible and must support the VT100
National Character set. If the terminal does not support the National Character set, the text
displays incorrectly.
You can enable or disable the serial port through Element Manager. This functionality is helpful
for diagnostics and to make the system more secure. By default the serial port is enabled.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 Chapter 13 Initializing the system
Null modem cable setup
Table 63 Serial port pinout
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
* Serial data in (RX)
* Serial data out (TX)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
* Ground
6
7
8
9
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
Ring Indicator (RI)
* required connections
Figure 91 Serial pinout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Transmission parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
9600 bits per second
8 data bits
no parity
1 stop bit
hardware flow control
Note: For instructions about how to set the transmission parameters, refer to the terminal
or terminal emulation program documentation. The BCM system supports carriage return.
To display the configuration menus
1
Attach the null modem cable to the serial port on the BCM main unit.
Note: The location of the transmit (TX) and receive (RX) pins on your terminal can vary.
Refer to your terminal or computer documentation to confirm pin locations.
2
3
4
Attach the other end of the null modem cable to the serial port on the terminal or computer.
Ensure that the BCM main unit and your terminal or computer are turned on.
Access the BCM main unit using one of the following methods:
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13 Initializing the system 181
a
b
If using a terminal emulation program (Hyperterminal), attach a configuration computer to
the BCM main unit serial port (recommended method).
If you are accessing the BCM main unit through your local area network through SSH
(secure socket shell), use the default IP address 10.10.10.1.
5
6
7
When prompted for a User ID, type:
nnadmin
When prompted for a Password, type:
PlsChgMe!
Figure 92 Configuration main menu screen
8
Enter the number of the parameter you want to configure.
Software keycode
You require a keycode to enable software features on the BCM system. You receive only one
keycode whether you purchase one feature or a bundle of features.
To generate a keycode, you require an authorization code for each feature you purchase.
For example, if you have one feature, you receive one authorization code and you will generate
one keycode. If you purchase four features, you receive four authorization codes, however, you
will still generate only one keycode.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 Chapter 13 Initializing the system
To generate a keycode through the Nortel Keycode Retrieval System (KRS), you require:
•
•
•
Username and password for the KRS (http://www.nortel.com/servsup/krs)
BCM 4.0 feature authorization code for each feature
BCM 4.0 system ID
You can apply a keycode file using:
•
•
•
For more information on keycodes, refer to the Keycode Installation Guide.
Regenerating a keycode after system replacement
If you replace your media services card (MSC), you must regenerate your keycode file to reflect
the new system identification. Apply the keycode file after you perform your system data restore.
For more information, refer to the Keycode Installation Guide.
Next step
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system 183
Chapter 14
Configuring the BCM system
This section provides information on configuring the basic BCM parameters. You can configure
more advanced parameters using Element Manager or Telset Administration after the BCM
system is operational.
Figure 93 shows an overview of configuring the basic BCM parameters.
Figure 93 Overview of configuring the basic BCM parameters
For simplicity, the task of configuring the basic BCM parameters is divided into two parts:
•
•
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system
Initial parameters overview
The initial parameters are the required parameters that can be configured using Telset
parameters.
Table 64 Initial parameters
Parameters
Keycode
Telset Administration
Element Manager
Startup Profile
Feature 9*8 > Feature codes Configuration > System >
Keycodes
Keycode
IP address:
Feature 9*8 > IP Address
Configuration > Resources IP Address
> Network Interface
•
•
•
Obtain dynamically
IP address
IP subnet mask
Modem:
Feature 9*8 > Modem
Feature **PROFILE
Configuration > Resources Modem
> Network Interface
•
Enable/disable modem
System:
Administration > Utilities > System
Reset > Cold Reset
Telephony Services
•
Region
Telephony startup:
Feature **STARTUP
Feature 983
Administration > Utilities > Telephony Startup
Reset > Cold Reset
Telephony Services
•
•
Template
Start DN
Voice mail:
Configuration >
Voice Mail Startup
Applications > Voice
Messaging/Contact Center
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant DN
UI style
Language
From Line
To Line
Number of rings
User account:
Feature 9*8 > User Accounts Configuration >
Administrator Access >
User Account
•
Telset user ID
(numeric)
Accounts and Privileges >
View by Accounts tab
•
Telset password
(numeric)
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system 185
Startup parameters overview
The startup parameters are the remaining required parameters that cannot be configured using
Telset Administration. These parameters must be configured using Element Manager or the
Table 65 Startup parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Parameters
System:
Telset Administration
Element Manager
Startup Profile
N/A
Configuration > System >
Identification
System
•
System name
(ID set automatically)
System:
N/A
N/A
Configuration > System >
Keycodes
System
Time
•
System ID
(View ID - it is set
automatically and cannot
be changed)
Time:
Configuration > System >
Date and Time
•
•
•
•
Date and Time source
NTP server address
Date and time
Time zone
DHCP server:
N/A
N/A
Configuration > Data
Services > DHCP Server >
Subnets tab
DHCP Server
•
•
•
•
•
Enable/disable server
IP domain name
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Default gateway
IP Phones:
Configuration > Resources IP Telephones
> Telephony Resources
•
•
•
•
•
Enable registration
Enable global pwd
Global pwd
Auto-assign DNs
Advertisement logo
SNMP Agent:
N/A
N/A
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
SNMP > General tab
SNMP Agent
•
Enable/disable SNMP
agent
•
•
Minimum security
SNMP version support
SNMP community:
Configuration >
SNMP Community
Administrator Access >
SNMP > Community
strings tab
•
•
Community string
Type of access
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 Chapter 14 Configuring the BCM system
Table 65 Startup parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Parameters
Telset Administration
Element Manager
Startup Profile
SNMP manager:
N/A
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
SNMP > General tab
SNMP Manager
•
Manager IP address
User account:
N/A
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
View by Accounts tab
User Account
•
•
•
•
User ID
Group
Description
Callback number
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 187
Chapter 15
Using Telset Administration to set the basic
parameters
Telset Administration allows you to use a digital telephone with a two-line display to set the BCM
configuration parameters. You cannot set all the basic parameters using Telset Administration.
Therefore, after configuring the initial parameters, you must use Element Manager to set the
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Telset Administration Guide for more information on Telset Administration.
Figure 94 shows an overview of using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters.
Figure 94 Overview of using Telset Administration
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
Configuring the initial parameters
Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM using Telset
Administration:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
To enter the keycodes
1
2
Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Feature Codes.
Press OK.
3
4
5
Press NEXT to scroll through the list and do one of the following:
a
If you want to enter keycodes to activate features, select Feature List.
•
•
Press SHOW to view the available features.
Use the soft keys to activate features for your system.
b
If you want to modify existing keycodes, select Keycode.
•
•
Press SHOW to view the keycodes.
Use the soft keys to modify existing keycodes for your system.
Refer to the Keycode Installation Guide for details on how to retrieve and enter the keycodes
for your system.
To configure the IP address
1
2
Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
3
Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select IP Address.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 189
4
5
Press OK.
Press CHNGE to modify the IP settings. The display screen shows if DHCP is enabled or
disabled.
6
Do one of the following:
a
If DHCP is currently enabled:
•
Press DIS to disable DHCP. You have the option to modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
and Default Gateway. However, these settings have no effect as long as the system is
disabled.
•
Press IP to modify the following IP settings:
— IP Address
— Subnet Mask
— Default Gateway
b
If DHCP is currently disabled:
•
•
Press ENL to enable DHCP. The system must reboot to enable DHCP.
Press IP to modify the IP settings. You have the option to modify the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Default Gateway. However, these settings have no effect as long as the system
is disabled.
7
Press Back to reboot the system.
To configure the modem
1
2
Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Modem.
Press OK. The display screen shows if the modem is enabled or disabled.
Do one of the following:
3
4
5
a
b
If the modem is disabled, press ENL to enable the modem.
If the modem is enabled, press DIS to disable the modem.
For more information on modem configuration refer to the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration
Guide.
To select the region
You set the region using Feature **PROFILE from a two-line display telephone.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Telset Administration Guide for information on using Telset Administration
to set this parameter.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
To select the telephony startup template and start DN
You set the template and start DN using Feature **STARTUP from a two-line display telephone.
Note: You can only set these parameters for only 15 minutes after system bootup.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Telset Administration Guide for information on using Telset Administration
to set this parameter.
Other telephony startup parameters are configured using Feature **CONFIG. Refer to the BCM
4.0 Telset Administration Guide for more information.
To initialize voice mail
You initialize your voice mail system using Feature 983 from a two-line display telephone.
Refer to the CallPilot Telephone Administation Guide for information on using Telset
Administration to initialize your voice mail system.
To create Telset user accounts
Note: You can only create Telset accounts using Telset Administration. To
create Element Manager accounts, you must use Element Manager.
1
2
Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select User Accounts.
Press OK. The Accounts screen appears.
3
4
5
6
7
Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts to create.
Press CHNGE to change the status of the current account.
Press CRT to create the account.
If you see the DEL command instead of the CRT command, then the account is already
created.
8
9
Press BACK. The Accounts screen appears.
Press NEXT. The password screen appears.
10 Press CHNGE to change the password.
11 Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 191
12 Press CHNGE to change the password for the selected account.
13 Enter the new password for the account.
14 Enter the new password again to confirm it.
using Element Manager.
Next step
After you configure the initial parameters using Telset Administration, you must configure the
startup parameters using Element Manager. Refer to “Configuring the startup parameters” on page
198 for more information.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 Chapter 15 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 193
Chapter 16
Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
The Element Manager application provides a computer-based client interface that can connect to
devices over an IP network and display the programming interface for that device.
Through Element Manager, you can configure all of the basic parameters, which include:
•
•
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide for more information on how to use Element Manager.
Figure 95 shows an overview of using Element Manager to set the basic parameters.
Figure 95 Overview of using Element Manager
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
Prerequisites
BCM Element Manager has the following system requirements:
•
•
•
•
Windows: Windows 98SE, Windows 2000, Windows XP
RAM: minimum 256 MB, recommended 512 MB
free space: 150 MB
BCM Element Manager access is also supported through a Citrix server
Accessing the BCM system
After your computer is connected to the BCM system, either through an Ethernet crossover cable
or through a LAN connection, you can download BCM Element Manager from the Administrator
Applications area of the BCM web page.
To access the BCM web page
1
Open a web browser and enter the BCM system IP address.
The Enter Network Password dialog box opens.
Enter the username and password (defaults are shown below):
Username: nnadmin
2
Password: PlsChgMe!
3
Click OK.
The Welcome to BCM web page opens.
To download and install BCM Element Manager
1
On the Welcome to BCM web page, click Administrator Applications.
The Administrator Applications page opens.
2
On the Administrator Applications page, click BCM Element Manager.
The BCM Element Manager panel opens.
3
4
Read the information on this panel.
Click Download Element Manager on the right side of the screen, and follow the instructions
to download.
5
After BCM Element Manager has finished downloading, double-click the application and
follow the instructions to install.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 195
To connect to the BCM system
1
2
Open BCM Element Manager.
From the Network menu, select New Network Element, and then select Business
Communications Manager.
3
Enter the BCM system IP address, the username, and password (the default is are shown
below):
IP address: 10.10.10.1
Username: nnadmin
Password: PlsChgMe!
4
5
6
7
Click OK.
From the Network Elements folder, select the BCM system IP address.
Make sure that the correct username and password are entered.
Click Connect.
You are now connected to the BCM system.
For more information on using BCM Element Manager, refer to the online Help within BCM
Element Manager.
Configuring the initial parameters
Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM system using BCM
Element Manager:
•
•
•
•
•
To enter a keycode
1
2
3
4
From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
Select Keycodes. The Keycodes panel opens.
Click Connect to Nortel Keycode Retrieval System. The Open dialog box opens.
Select the keycode file for your system and click Open.
Refer to the Keycode Installation Guide for details on how to retrieve and enter the keycodes for
your system.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
To configure the LAN IP address
1
2
3
4
5
6
From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
Select Network Interfaces.
Select the Interfaces tab. It is normally selected by default.
Select the LAN interface to configure.
From the Details panel, select the IP Settings tab.
From the IP Address Specification area, click Modify. The Modify IP Settings dialog box
opens.
7
Table 66 Modify IP Settings attributes
Attribute
Description
Obtain IP address dynamically
If this is selected, the BCM system attempts to take IP address
information from a DHCP server.
If this is not selected, you must enter values for static IP address, IP
subnet mask, and Default gateway.
IP address
The IP address of the BCM system.
IP subnet mask
The subnet mask used by the BCM system.
Note: If any of the attributes are modified, then the Element Manager session is disconnected.
8
Click Ok.
To configure the modem
1
2
3
4
5
From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
Select Network Interfaces.
Select the Global Settings tab.
Select the regional profile from the Modem Region dropdown list for your region.
Select the Enable modem checkbox to enable the modem.
For more information on modem configuration, refer to the BCM 4.0 Networking
Configuration Guide.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 197
To configure the startup template for telephony services
Note: This procedure erases all the telephony programming that is currently on
the BCM system.
1
2
3
4
From the Administration tab, click the Utilities folder to expand it.
Select Reset.
Click Cold Reset Telephony Services. The Cold Reset Telephony dialog box opens.
Table 67 Cold Reset Telephony attributes
Attribute
Description
Region
Specify the startup region.
Template
Specify the startup template.
Start DN
Specify the startup DN. The default is 221.
Force MSC Download
Select the checkbox to enable a forced download of
the modified information.
5
Click Ok.
To initialize voice mail
1
2
3
From the Configuration tab, click Applications folder to expand it.
Select Voice Messaging/Contact Center.
Click Launch CallPilot Manager. The Quick Install Wizard form opens.
If your voice mail system is already initialized, you will not see the Quick Install Wizard.
Instead you will see the CallPilot Manager: Main Menu web page.
4
Table 68 Quick Install Wizard attributes
Attribute
Description
Attendant DN
Enter the extension number of the attendant or operator assigned to CallPilot.
Select the mailbox user interface used as a default for the mailboxes.
Primary UI Style
If you select NVM, the mailbox user interface uses Norstar voice mail voice and text
prompts.
If you select CallPilot, the mailbox user interface uses CallPilot voice and text
prompts.
Primary Language
From Line
Select the language used as the primary language for the mailboxes.
Enter the line number of the first line in the range of lines you want CallPilot to
answer. CallPilot answers the range of lines between this line and the line you
enter in the To Line box.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
Table 68 Quick Install Wizard attributes
Attribute
Description
To Line
Enter the line number of the last line in the range of lines you want CallPilot to
answer.
Number of rings
Enter the number of rings you want CallPilot to wait before answering lines.
5
Click Install.
Configuring the startup parameters
Use the following procedures to configure the startup parameters for the BCM system using
Element Manager:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
To enter a name for your system
1
2
3
From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
Select Identification from the System folder.
Enter a name for your system in the System name field.
To configure the date and time settings
1
2
From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
Select Date and Time. The Date and Time panel opens.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 199
3
Table 69 Date and Time attributes
Attribute
Description
Date and Time source
Set to NTP if the system uses a network server to determine the correct
time and date.
Set to Trunk if you want to receive time and date settings from PSTN (if
available).
Set to Manual if you want to be able to manually configure the time and
date for your system.
NTP server
If Date and Time source is set to NTP, then enter an address for the
server.
Date and time
Time zone
Use the drop-down calendar to select the correct date and time.
Select the time zone for this system.
To configure DHCP server settings
1
2
3
4
From the Configuration tab, click the Data Services folder to expand it.
Select DHCP Server.
Select the DHCP Settings tab.
Configure the DHCP mode attribute. Select either DHCP Server or DHCP Relay Agent from
the dropdown list.
5
Click the Subnets tab and select the LAN1 heading.
The details panel for LAN1 appears.
6
7
Select the General Settings tab.
Configure the attributes according to the following table.
Table 70 Subnets: General Settings attributes (Sheet 1 of 2)
Attribute
Description
IP domain name
The domain name of the network.
Primary DNS IP address
Allows you to specify the IP addresses of the primary DNS server in a valid dot
format.
BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or
subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is
overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
Secondary DNS IP address Allows you to specify the IP addresses of the secondary DNS server in a valid
dot format.
BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or
subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is
overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
WINS server address
Allows you to specify the IP address of the WINS server.
BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or
subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is
overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
Table 70 Subnets: General Settings attributes (Sheet 2 of 2)
Attribute
Description
WINS node type
Allows you to specify a client’s WINS node type.
The BCM system automatically sets this value to H-node on all DHCP clients.
This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use P-node name resolution
before resorting to B-node name resolution. This is efficient when a WINS
server is configured for the network. The BCM system also includes a WINS
server.
Note: Use caution if you change this attribute.
Default gateway
Lease time
Allows you to specify the IP address of the default next-hop router.
BCM automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or
subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is
overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
Allows you to specify the time, in seconds, for an address assignment until the
client’s lease expires.
The default is 259200 seconds (72 hours).
8
9
Click the IP Terminal DHCP Options tab.
Table 71 DHCP server: IP Terminal DHCP Options attributes
Attribute
Description
VLAN identifiers
(comma-delimited)
Allows you to specify the Virtual LAN (VLAN) ID numbers that are given to the
IP telephones.
TFTP Server
Allows you to specify the IP address of the TFTP server that is used by WLAN
IP telephones. If your system does not have WLAN IP telephones, leave this
box empty.
Enter the IP address in a valid dot format.
WLAN IP Telephony
Manager 2245
Allows you to specify the IP address of the SVP server that is used by WLAN
IP telephones. If your system does not have WLAN IP telephones, leave this
box empty.
Enter the IP address in a valid dot format.
To configure IP Phones
1
2
3
From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
Select Telephony Resources.
From the Actual Type column, select IP & App Sets.
The Details for Module area displays in the lower pane with the IP Terminal Global Settings
tab as the default.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 201
4
Table 72 IP Terminal Global Settings attributes
Attribute
Description
Enable registration
Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system.
WARNING: Remember to clear this check box when you have finished
registering the new telephones.
Enable global registration
password
If you want to require the installer to enter a password when IP telephones are
configured and registered to the system, select this box.
If this box is not selected (disabled), a valid Telset user ID and password is
required to register IP phones.
Global password
Auto-assign DNs
If the Enable Global Registration Password check box is selected, enter the
password the installer enters on the IP telephone to connect to the system.
If this check box is left clear, no password prompt occurs during registration.
If this check box is selected, the system assigns an available DN as an IP
terminal requests registration. It does not prompt the installer to enter a set
DN.
If this check box is clear, the installer receives a prompt to enter the assigned
DN during the programming session.
Advertisement/Logo
Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP telephones. For
example, your company name or slogan (24 characters in length).
Tip: To automatically configure IP Phones with DNs assigned:
1) Select the Enable registration check box.
2) Select the Enable global registration password check box.
3) Leave the Global password field blank.
4) Select the Auto-assign DNs check box.
After the IP Phones are operational, clear the Enable registration check
box.
You can configure other attributes on the IP Terminal Global Settings tab depending on the
requirements for your system.
To configure SNMP settings
1
2
3
4
From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
Select SNMP from the Administrator Access folder.
Select the General tab. It is normally selected by default.
Click Modify in the SNMP Settings area. The Modify SNMP Settings dialog box opens.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
5
Table 73 Modify SNMP Settings attributes
Attribute
Description
Enable SNMP Agent
Select whether to enable or disable the SNMP agent by selecting (or not
selecting) the check box.
Minimum required security Select the minimum required security for SNMP from the drop-down list.
SNMP Version Support Select the SMNP version support from the drop-down list.
6
Click Ok.
To configure SNMP community strings
1
2
3
4
5
From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
Select SNMP from the Administrator Access folder.
Select the Community Strings tab.
Click Add.... The Add Community String dialog box opens.
Table 74 Add Community String attributes
Attribute
Description
Community string
Enter the entry name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual
community entry on the SNMP agent.
Type of access
Specify the read and write access for this community. Available options are
Read Only and Read/Write.
6
Click Ok.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add more community strings.
7
To configure the SNMP manager list
Use the SNMP manager list to specify IP addresses that are allowed to connect to the SNMP agent.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
Select SNMP from the Administrator Access folder.
Select the General tab. It is normally selected by default.
Click Add... in the SNMP Manager List area. The Add Manager dialog box opens.
Enter the IP address in the Manager IP Address field.
Click Ok.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add another manager IP address.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 203
To create user accounts
1
2
3
4
5
From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
Select Accounts and Privileges from the Administrator Access folder.
Select the View by Accounts tab.
Click Add... to add a user account. The Add Account dialog box opens.
Table 75 Add Account attributes
Attribute
Description
Description
Enter a description for this account.
User ID
Enter a descriptive name for the user or the user function.
Enter a password for this account.
Password
Telset user ID (numeric)
If the user performs administration through the Telset interface, enter a
number for the user ID.
Telset password (numeric) Enter a password for the Telset User ID.
Modem Callback Number If Callback is required, enter the number to which the system calls back in
order to verify the dial-up user access.
Modem Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm the callback is legitimate.
ISDN Callback Number
If ISDN Callback is required, enter the number to which the system calls back
in order to verify the dial-up user access.
ISDN Callback Passcode
This is the code the system uses to confirm that the ISDN callback is
legitimate.
Change Password On
Login
Select this checkbox to force the user to change the password upon first login.
Change Password On
Login Telset
Select this checkbox to force the user to change the Telset password upon
first login.
6
Click Ok.
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to create more user accounts.
7
Next step
After you set the basic parameters, proceed to “Completing the initial installation (optional)” on
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 Chapter 16 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 205
Chapter 17
Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
The Startup Profile tool enables an experienced administrator to customize a template with
common BCM parameters. This template is used to quickly configure one or multiple systems.
You create the Startup Profile using the Startup Profile template (a Microsoft Excel template). You
then use a USB storage device to transfer the Startup Profile data to the BCM main unit.
Loading the Startup Profile increases the time for the BCM system to boot depending on the
selected parameters. For example, if you apply a keycode using the Startup Profile, the BCM
system might reboot, which can add up to 30 minutes to the total time. However, if your selected
parameters do not require a reboot, as little as 5 extra minutes are added to the total time for the
system to become operational. If you decide to configure these parameters using Element
Manager, the overall time required for system reboots and applying the parameters are the same.
When the Startup Profile is successfully applied, the BCM system automatically reboots to
complete the system configuration. The Startup Profile is not fully loaded until the system reboots.
Figure 96 shows an overview of using the Startup Profile.
Figure 96 Overview of using the Startup Profile
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
Note: The USB storage device must be formatted for the FAT32 file system. If
necessary, reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into the USB port of
your computer, right-clicking the USB device icon, and selecting FAT32
reformatting. This destroys any data you had on the USB.
Note: The Startup Profile functions only on a BCM system that does not have a keycode
applied. After a keycode is applied, the Startup Profile does not function. This condition
prevents overwriting of the parameters of a configured system.
To re-apply the Startup Profile, remove the applied keycode file by returning the system to
factory defaults using the BIT tool.
Refer to the following sections for information on setting the initial parameters on the BCM
system:
•
•
Startup Profile requirements
To use the Startup Profile template, you need the following:
•
•
•
a computer with a USB port
Microsoft Excel 2000 or later
the Nortel BCM Startup Profile template (Microsoft Excel template)
If you do not have the Startup Profile template on your computer, you can get a copy from the
the Nortel support web site (www.nortel.com/support) or the Administrator Applications page
on getting the Startup Profile template from the main unit.
•
a portable USB storage device compatible with USB 1.1 (formatted for FAT32)
To download the Startup Profile template
1
2
From the Welcome to BCM web page, click Administrator Applications.
The Administrator Applications page opens.
3
4
From the Administrator Applications page, click Startup Profile Template.
The Startup Profile Template panel opens.
Read the information on this panel.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 207
5
Click Download Startup Profile Template on the right side of the screen, and follow the
instructions to download.
Configuring basic parameters
To customize a Startup Profile for your system
Note: The Startup Profile template uses macros to perform certain functions. You
must set your Excel macro security level to medium or low to enable the macros:
•
From the Tools menu, select Macros, then select Security..., and select
Medium or Low.
•
•
•
Exit from Excel.
Open the Startup Profile template (in Excel).
Enable macros if prompted.
Note: You cannot copy and paste data between cells in the Startup Profile. If you
attempt this, the data validation within the spreadsheet becomes corrupt. If
corruption occurs, download another copy of the Startup Profile template from the
BCM main unit.
1
On a computer that has a USB port and Microsoft Excel, open the Startup Profile template
(Microsoft Excel template).
If you do not have a copy of the Startup Profile template, see “To download the Startup Profile
2
3
Refer to the Usage Instructions tab for instructions about using the Startup Profile template.
Click the StartupProfileTemplate tab to begin entering information in the Startup Profile
template.
4
5
Enter your BCM system ID in the System ID field in the Startup Profile template.
The system ID is on the box of the main unit and on the main unit itself. If you enter the wrong
system ID, the Startup Profile will not work with your system.
Click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup
Profile (.sps file) and a version of the Startup Profile editor (Excel spreadsheet) on your
computer.
The filenames for the Startup Profile editor and the Startup Profile consist of the system ID
followed by the appropriate extension.
Note: Never edit the Startup Profile (.sps file) directly; always use the Startup
Profile editor to make changes.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
6
Enter the remaining information into the Startup Profile editor that you want loaded onto the
BCM main unit.
The Startup Profile editor contains explanations of the various parameters. Click the cell
where you want to enter information, and the Help text appears.
You can specify which parameters to load onto your system by selecting Apply for the
parameters you want to load. If you do not want to load certain parameters, select Ignore.
7
When you have entered all the information, click the large button at the top of the Startup
Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile (.sps file) and a version of the Startup
Profile editor (Excel spreadsheet) on your computer.
8
9
Exit from Microsoft Excel.
Insert the USB storage device into the USB port of the computer.
10 Copy the Startup Profile (.sps file) to the root directory of the USB storage device.
11 If you want to apply your keycode file using the Startup Profile, copy the keycode file to the
root directory of the USB storage device.
The name of the keycode file on the USB storage device must exactly match the filename you
entered in the Startup Profile editor.
12 Remove the USB storage device from the USB port of the computer.
The Startup Profile is now stored on the USB storage device.
To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM system
1
2
3
Turn off the power switch at the rear of the main unit.
Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on the main unit.
Turn on the power switch at the rear of the main unit.
The BCM system automatically detects the Startup Profile file and loads the information
during the bootup sequence. Loading the Startup Profile increases the time for the BCM
Profile times and LED status.
The Startup Profile is not fully loaded until the system reboots.
Note: The Startup Profile functions only on a BCM system that does not have a keycode
file applied. After a keycode file is applied, the Startup Profile does not function. This
condition prevents overwriting of the parameters of a configured system.
To re-apply the Startup Profile, remove the applied keycode file by returning the system to
factory defaults using the BIT tool.
3
the appropriate point in the sequence to remove the USB storage device.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 209
Note: Make sure the bootup sequence is complete before removing the USB
storage device from the BCM system.
The Startup Profile is now loaded on your BCM system.
Startup Profile times and LED sequence
Table 76 provides details about the BCM system boot times and LED sequence using the Startup
Profile to configure system parameters.
Table 76 Startup Profile times and LED sequence
Cummulative
Duration
time
(minutes) (minutes)
Power LED
Status LED
Comments
2
2
Solid green
Solid red
Flashing green
off
4
6
2
8
Solid green
Solid red
Solid green
Solid green
Initial boot sequence complete
30
38
Startup Profile functioning. Duration
varies depending on selected
parameters.
2
40
Solid green
Flashing green
Off (error)
off
Startup Profile is successfully applied.
If there is an error the remaining steps
are not completed.
4
2
44
46
Solid red
Duration varies based on selected
parameters.
Solid green
Solid green
Reboot complete and system is
functional.
Note: You can safely remove USB
device.
Note 1: If you use Element Manager to configure the parameters, the overall times are similar. Startup Profile
enables you to configure multiple parameters at once, rather than individually using Element Manager.
Note 2: To re-apply the Startup Profile, remove the applied keycode file by returning the system to factory defaults
using the BIT tool.
Next step
After you have loaded the Startup Profile, you can complete the installation process. Refer to
“Completing the initial installation (optional)” on page 211 for more information.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 Chapter 17 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation (optional) 211
Chapter 18
Completing the initial installation (optional)
This section provides information on completing the initial installation of your BCM system.
These options are described for informative purposes and do not have to be completed.
Figure 97 shows an overview of completing the initial installation.
Figure 97 Overview of completing the initial installation
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation (optional)
After the basic configuration is completed, you can further customize your system by using the
following configuration options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuring the media bay module
For information on installing a media bay module (MBM) and setting the DIP switches, refer to
You can also refer to “Connecting the BCM expansion unit to the BCM main unit” on page 103
for more details on connecting the cables between the main unit and expansion unit.
To configure the MBM
1
2
3
Open BCM Element Manager and connect to your BCM system.
From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
Figure 98 Telephony Resources page
4
5
In the Modules section, select the row of the MBM that you want to configure.
Double-click the Prog Type field to display the drop-down list.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation (optional) 213
6
7
8
Select the type of MBM that you installed in that location.
Click Enable.
Repeat steps 4 to 7 to enable each MBM in your system.
You can set other parameters for the MBMs depending on the type of MBM you installed.
Configuring modem settings
Your system modem is either enabled or disabled, depending on the configuration you chose
during your basic configuration. If you plan on using the modem for management tasks, you can
customize its settings, including dial-in and dial-out settings, depending on your specific needs.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Networking Configuration Guide for information on configuring the modem.
Checking for software updates
Nortel frequently updates the BCM software. Therefore, a standard part of any installation is to
ensure your system has the latest version of the software.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide for information on checking for and installing
software updates.
Configuring voice mail
Your voice mail system was initialized during the basic configuration of your BCM system. You
must still configure your voice mail to take advantage of the many feature available.
If you need to perform further configuration tasks, refer to the documentation for your voice mail
system.
Refer to the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide for information on using the
web-based interface to configure your voice mail system, or refer to the CallPilot Telephone
Administation Guide for information on using Telset Administration to configure your voice mail
system.
Customizing security policies
You configured a system password and security settings during the basic configuration of your
BCM system. Depending on your needs, you can choose to perform further configuration of the
security policies.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide for information on customizing the security policies.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 Chapter 18 Completing the initial installation (optional)
Performing a backup
You can perform a backup of your BCM system at regular intervals, including after initial
installation. This ensures that you have a copy of your system data available to restore the system,
if needed.
Refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide for information on performing a backup and restore of
your system.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
Chapter 19
System monitoring and troubleshooting
This chapter describes monitoring and troubleshooting options to determine the operational status
of, or cause of malfunctions in, the BCM hardware.
This section describes the following troubleshooting topics and issues:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Danger: Electrical shock warning.
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the main
unit. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Use Element Manager, or remote access interfaces, in conjunction with the faceplate LEDs to
determine the operational state of the system hardware components.
Hardware problems are indicated by the following:
•
The LEDs on the BCM base function tray, advanced function tray (RAID upgrade), or the
media bay modules (MBMs) do not display normal operational status.
•
•
•
The BCM system does not function at all.
The emergency telephone does not function.
The ATA2 does not function.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
System status display LEDs
The LEDs on the BCM base function tray are part of the system status display (SSD) board. Figure
99 shows an interior view of the base function tray and the SSD board location.
Figure 99 SSD board connections
System status display board mounting
screws
SSD board
Main card
connector
PCI Riser
card
connectors
Modem
card
SSD Main
card
connector
DIMM
connectors
BIOS
battery
I/O card
connector
Main card
Figure 100 shows what the LEDs look like on the outside of the base function tray. The labels in
the illustration indicate the hardware that each LED supports.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 217
Figure 100 LED locations on the face of the base function tray
Trouble
Red
Off
Green Flash or Off
Red
indication
WAN
LAN 1
Modem
Temp
Fan Reset
Component
Power
Disk Status
MSC
LAN 2
BCM400
Note: The system status LEDs correspond to the devices, not to the PCI slots.
Note: LEDs 3 - 8 (inclusive) do not blink if there is a failure in the monitoring software.
Monitoring media bay module LEDs
The BCM MBMs are working when both the Power and Status LEDs on the modules are on and
are not blinking.
•
the BCM system is correctly shut down, remove the module and check the connectors at the
back of the module for dust or loose connections.
After you reinstall the module, if the LED still does not light, install a different module into
that bay to check for a possible fault in the backplane. If the second module works, assume
that the first module is defective and replace it with a new module.
•
•
If the Power LED lights, but the Status light does not light, or continues to blink, wait 10
minutes to allow for information download. If the light continues to blink, power down the
system and check the DIP switch settings on the module. Ensure the connector is clean and
free from debris.
If the LEDs are on solid, but the module cannot communicate or be communicated with, check
the Element Manager settings for the module and the DIP switch settings on the back of the
module.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
working properly, these LEDs are both solid green.
Table 77 Module power and status LED states
LED
Label
Description
Green LED On
Green LED Flash
Red LED On (Only)
Green LED Off
Indicates state OK
of system
N/A
A minimum of 1 PS
needs attention
N/A
power.
Indicates
condition of
system status
All monitored
services are
functioning
In startup/shutdown N/A
mode
Not all services are
working
Some types of modules also have LEDs beside the jacks or for data indicators. Refer to the
information on individual modules for a description of the function of these LEDs.
The BCM system status monitor allows you to view the status of the system LEDs on your PC.
This status display allows you to make preliminary decisions regarding the type of intervention
required without necessarily having to inspect the BCM hardware.
Monitoring standard configuration hard disk status using Element
Manager
Use the procedure described in this section to monitor the operational status of systems equipped
with the standard hard disk configuration. The standard configuration uses a single hard disk.
The procedures describe monitoring and diagnosis techniques for the standard hard disk
configuration.
Note: If you are using the Element Manager system status monitor function, ensure the
hard disk monitoring configuration settings are set correctly.
Use the system status monitor from Element Manager to determine the operational status of the
hard disk. Alternatively, examine the LED display panel on the front of the base function tray (see
Note: If the hard disk fails completely in a standard configuration, the system either fails
to respond or performs a software shutdown. Replace the hard disk and perform a backup
using the backup and restore utility (BRU). See “Using the backup and restore utility” on
The system status monitor indicator shows hard disk access activity. A flashing green indicator
signifies normal disk access activity.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 219
To monitor hard disk status
1
2
Open Element Manager.
From the Administration tab, click System Status, and then click LED Status.
Figure 101 LED Status screen
3
Verify that the indicator shows normal access to the hard disk (flashing green light).
If the hard disk fails in a single hard disk configuration, a system shutdown is either imminent,
in progress, or complete. Replace the hard disk (see “Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk
Monitoring the RAID LEDs
Use this procedure to determine the current operational state of the RAID hard disks and disk
equipped with the RAID configuration. Three LEDs are located on the bezel face of the BCM400
advanced function tray or on the hard disk access panel at the rear of the BCM200 main unit.
The RAID LEDs indicate monitoring of the following:
•
•
•
Primary master hard disk activity
Mirror hard disk activity
RAID disk mirroring status activity
Figure 102 Advanced function tray RAID status LEDs
Alarm Reset
Primary
Mirror
Status
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
To determine RAID status
1
Examine the Primary and Mirror LEDs on the BCM400 advanced function tray faceplate.
Alternatively, examine the hard disk cover access panel on the rear of the BCM200. Use
Table 78 to interpret the operational state of the RAID primary master and mirror master hard
disks and perform any associated maintenance action if required.
Table 78 Primary/Mirror master hard disk LED description
Primary/Mirror
LED color
Description
Maintenance action
Solid Green
Drive installed and initialized on the
current channel
Normal operation — no maintenance
required
Flashing Orange Indicates disk activity
Normal disk mirror function — no
maintenance required
Orange
Channel activity (read/write)
Drive not installed or failed
Normal operation during disk mirror function
— no maintenance required
Solid Red
Immediate action required:
•
•
Check the RAID operational status
Check hard disk power and data
connections
•
Replace the hard disk if required
2
Examine the mirror mode Status LED on the BCM400 advanced function tray faceplate.
Alternatively, examine the hard disk cover access panel on the rear of the BCM200. Use
Table 79 to interpret the operational state of the disk mirror function. Perform any associated
maintenance action if required.
Table 79 Status LED description (Sheet 1 of 2)
Status LED
description
Description
Maintenance action
Solid green
Drives are in mirror mode. Data is
identical.
Normal operation -— no maintenance
required
Orange
Copy or compare is in progress.
Normal operation — no maintenance
required
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 221
Table 79 Status LED description (Sheet 2 of 2)
Status LED
description
Description
Maintenance action
Flashing green
Drives may not be identical.
Indicates a data comparison fault. For 3.5x
version software (and later), the system
automatically adapts for data mismatches
and unequal hard disk capacity. The system
attempts a disk mirror rebuild.
The system continues to operate. Nortel
recommends that you perform the following:
•
Examine the status report to determine
which hard disk has the smaller
capacity.
•
Replace the smaller hard disk (primary
master or mirror master) with a new hard
disk of the correct size. Equipment
provided by Nortel assures correct hard
disk capacity requirements.
Solid red
•
•
•
Drives are not in mirror mode.
Immediate action required:
Missing or bad hard disk (1 or both).
•
•
Check the RAID operational status.
Occurs on newly installed RAID card
or hard disk (first 10 min). SSM
begins mirror process — no action
required.
Check hard disk power and data
connections.
•
•
Replace the hard disk if required.
Initialize the BCM system.
•
SSM determined BCM is not
initialized (core software, WAN,
MSC).
RAID disk mirroring
The RAID configuration (RAID 1) uses two hard disks. One disk is called the primary master hard
disk and the other is called the mirror master hard disk. Disk mirroring is the process of ensuring
the data from one hard disk is identical to the other.
Disk mirroring provides data redundancy and fault tolerance should one disk fail. The mirror hard
disk continues to function and the system operates without any loss of service if the primary
master hard disk fails. Similarly, the primary master hard disk continues to function and the system
operates without any loss of service if the mirror hard disk fails.
Over time, configuration or load data on your system changes. The system writes the new data to
both disks simultaneously.
Note: Under some conditions, the system will halt operating if a hard disk fails during a
read/write to the operating system (O/S) portion of the hard disk. To continue operation,
reboot the system.
The RAID configuration disk replacement scenarios are as follows:
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
•
•
If you replace a RAID hard disk on site, the BCM system status monitor service automatically
detects the presence of a RAID device. The system copies the data from the programmed disk
to the blank replacement disk. In this case, the programmed hard disk is the mirror master.
If you replace a RAID primary master disk on site, the mirror master disk acts as the primary
data source (mirror master). The system status monitor service identifies the new blank
primary master disk and instructs the RAID to copy the data from the mirror master disk to the
primary master disk. In this case, the mirror master hard disk is the mirror master.
Use one of the following two methods to access the disk mirror functions:
•
•
The disk mirror function allows you to:
•
•
•
•
•
monitor RAID card operational status
monitor disk operational status
monitor disk mirror status
change a standard hard disk configuration to a RAID configuration
replace a primary master or mirror master hard disk in an existing RAID configuration
Monitoring or configuring disk mirror settings using Element
Manager
Use the procedures in this section to ensure all disk mirroring configuration settings are correct.
Use Element Manager to change the disk mirror settings to the default values if required. The
procedures described in this section are valid only for those systems equipped with a RAID
configuration.
Accessing disk mirroring through Element Manager
Use this procedure to review the primary master and mirror master hard disk settings on systems
equipped with a RAID configuration. Use Element Manager in this procedure to monitor the
RAID disk mirror operation.
Note: You must ensure the system status monitor service is running to monitor primary
master and mirror master disk operation and disk mirroring activity.
To access disk mirroring
1
2
Access Element Manager after system bootup is complete.
From the Administration tab, click System Status, and then click Disk Mirroring.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 223
3
In the Settings area, ensure the following fields display the default values as shown (see
Table 80):
a
b
Operation Mode = Mirror Mode
Beep on drive failure = Every 30 seconds (you can configure the interval between beeps).
Note: On some systems, if the RAID card fails, the audible alarm sounds continuously for
15 seconds. After the 15 second period, the beep alarm sounds in accordance to the beep
timing setting.
Figure 103 Disk mirror settings screen
Table 80 Setting field descriptions and actions
Settings field description
Perform the activity
Nortel recommends that you select Mirror mode from the
Operation Mode: Options available are
Primary Only, Mirror Only, or Mirror Mode drop-down menu
(default value).
You can disable the mirroring function and operate from either
the primary master or the mirror master drive only. Use this
option to isolate drive problems.
Beep on drive failure: Options available Select the beep timing interval for alarm notification.
are disabled, continuously, Every 5
seconds, or Every 30 seconds (default
value).
On some systems, if the RAID card fails, the audible alarm
sounds continuously for 15 seconds. After the 15 second
period, the beep alarm sounds in accordance to the beep
timing setting.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
Monitoring RAID disk mirror operational status using Element
Manager
Use this procedure to monitor the primary master and mirror master hard disk activity on systems
equipped with a RAID configuration. Use Element Manager in this procedure to monitor the
RAID disk mirror operation.
Note: You must ensure the system status monitor service is running to monitor primary
master and mirror master disk operation and disk mirroring activity.
To monitor RAID disk mirror operational status
1
2
Open Element Manager.
From the Administration tab, click System Status, and then click Disk Mirroring.
The Disk Mirroring screen displays.
3
4
Click on the Status tab
The Disk Mirroring screen displays the operational status of primary master and mirror master
disks.
Table 81 Status field descriptions
Status field
Description
DupliWin.dll Version
Read-only field that displays the RAID software version. The latest load always
has the latest RAID software.
Primary Master Status Read-only field that displays the status of the primary master disk (Passed/Failed/
NA).
•
•
If the field indicates Passed, the drive is operating normally
If the field indicates Failed, check the power and IDE ribbon cable connections
or replace the faulty hard disk
•
If the field indicates N/A (not available), check the hard disk power and IDE
ribbon cable connections
Mirror Master Status
Read-only field that displays the status of the mirror master disk (Passed/Failed/
NA)
•
•
If the field indicates Passed, the drive is operating normally
If the field indicates Failed, check the power and IDE ribbon cable connections
or replace the failed hard disk
•
If the field indicates N/A (not available), check the hard disk power and IDE
ribbon cable connections
Rebuild
Read-only field that displays the mirror data rebuild progress (idle/started)
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 225
Accessing the RAID status report using Element Manager
Use the procedure in this section to display a status report that summarizes primary master and
mirror master hard disk installation and operational information. The status report is valid only for
systems equipped with a RAID configuration.
Note: You must ensure the system status monitor service is enabled to monitor primary
master and mirror master disk operation and disk mirroring activity.
To access the RAID status report
1
2
Open Element Manager.
From the Administration tab, click System Status, and then click Disk Mirroring.
The Disk Mirroring screen displays, which displays the hard disk operational status
information.
3
Table 82 Step table
If
Then perform the activity
The hard disks are not identical. Use Nortel equipment to ensure the hard disks meet minimum
requirements.
The software has detected
unequal hard disk storage
capacity.
For 3.5x version software (and later), the system automatically adapts for
unequal hard disk capacity. The system continues to operate. Nortel
recommends that you perform the following:
•
Examine the status report to determine which hard disk has the
smaller capacity.
•
Replace the smaller hard disk (primary master or mirror master) with a
new hard disk of equal size (or larger).
The RAID is not in mirror mode. Change the disk mirroring function to mirror mode.
A hard disk is not operational. Exchange the malfunctioning hard disk with a new hard disk.
Monitoring disk mirroring using Element Manager
Use this procedure to verify and monitor the disk mirroring process. Disk mirroring is the process
of duplicating the data from one hard disk to the other. After RAID installation and system bootup,
the system automatically detects the presence of a RAID configuration and begins the disk
initialization and mirroring process. This procedure is valid only for those systems equipped with a
RAID configuration.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
Monitor disk mirroring progress in tandem with the RAID LED status indicators.
Note: The mirroring process can take up to 3 hours to complete. The BCM system
continues to operate normally during the disk mirroring process. However, because disk
mirroring occupies computing resources, Nortel recommends that you perform disk
mirroring during a period of low call traffic.
Nortel recommends that you perform any system reboot only as required and at the
beginning of the disk mirroring process.
To monitor disk mirroring
1
2
Open Element Manager after system boot-up is complete.
From the Administration tab, click System Status, and then click Disk Mirroring.
3
Select Reports and click Drive Status.
The progress indicator shows the current state of the mirroring process.
BCM system does not function
The BCM system can experience a complete failure for any of the following reasons:
•
•
•
Power supply failure
Incorrect power supply connections
AC power failure
Emergency telephone does not function
If the emergency telephone is connected to the system, refer to “To troubleshoot the emergency
If the emergency telephone is connected to the CTM, refer to “To troubleshoot the emergency
To troubleshoot the emergency telephone on the system
1
2
3
4
Check the power LED on the ASM8 to check that the ASM8 is receiving power.
Check that the emergency telephone has dial tone.
Check the external line and emergency telephone connections.
To avoid damage to the emergency telephone, connect the telephone directly to the external
line and check for dial tone.
5
Replace the MSC.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting 227
To troubleshoot the emergency telephone connected to a CTM
1
2
3
Check that the system has a CTM installed.
Check that there is no dial tone at the emergency telephone.
Replace the CTM.
ATA2 does not function
If the BCM ATA2 does not function, use these procedures to troubleshoot the problem.
To troubleshoot the ATA2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Make sure there is AC power connected to the ATA2 unit.
Make sure that the ATA2 is in the tones off mode (for data applications only).
Correctly configure the ATA2 telephone port for data communication.
Allow sufficient start-up time.
Assign the prime line.
Assign a ringing line if required. For example, auto-answer modems and fax machines require
a ringing line.
To check the ATA 2 wiring
1
ATA2 to the terminal. The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and
1,300 ohms or less for voice applications.
2
BCM system to ATA2. The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0.5 mm wire (2,600 ft. of
24 AWG) or less. Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the BCM system and
ATA2.
3
External line to the BCM system. Ensure the external line is correctly connected to the BCM
system and make sure there is dial tone.
To check for dial tone at the ATA 2
1
2
If there is no dial tone, replace an analog telephone for the data communication device.
If there is no dial tone at the ATA2 unit:
a
b
Disconnect the line side of ATA2. Connect a BCM telephone to the ATA2 port.
Check that the connection from ATA2 to the BCM system is functioning correctly (the
telephone has dial tone).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 Chapter 19 System monitoring and troubleshooting
To check for trunk line dial tone to the ATA 2
1
Disconnect the ATA2 external line from the BCM system and connect the data device directly
to this external line.
2
3
4
5
Make a call.
If the problem continues, the device or the external line is possibly at fault.
Plug the device into a different line.
If the problem continues, the device is possibly at fault.
For more information about ATA2, contact your customer service representative.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 229
Chapter 20
Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
This chapter describes how to prepare the BCM system for maintenance activities. The following
primary topics are covered in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Precautions
Before you replace or update any hardware on the BCM system, disconnect the system from the
trunk lines.
Remove the top cover to access the standard power supply, I/O card, or backplane components.
For fan, hard disk, or power supply maintenance, remove the appropriate chassis panels. Remove
the base function tray to replace any PCI cards. Remove the advanced function tray from the
BCM400 main unit to replace or upgrade the hard disk. If applicable, remove the main unit from
the server rack.
Observe the following precautions when working inside the BCM system. Maintain a clean and
static-safe site.
Danger: Electrical shock warning
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the BCM
main unit. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Danger: Electrical shock warning
Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage. Do not completely
remove the power supply module. IMPORTANT: Wait several seconds before removing
the power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete
electrical discharge.
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement. Contact your account representative
for the current list of approved replacement parts.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
Warning: Maintain a current backup of your system
When you replace the hard disk, you must restore the BCM system programming from the
backup.
Caution: Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk. You can
lose the information stored on the disk. Shock can damage the hard disk. Do not drop or
hit the hard disk drive.
Warning: You must remove all of the connections to the BCM base function tray before
you power the system down. Failure to disconnect lines before power down can cause
damage to the system.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Figure 104 provides an overview of the process for preparing the BCM system hardware for
maintenance or upgrade procedures.
Figure 104 Prepare for maintenance overview
Shut down
the system
Disconnectcables
from the front of
the main unit and
expansion unit
Remove the top
from the unit
Restore power
to the units
Reconnect
cables to the
front of the units
Perform
maintenance/
upgrade
Remove AC power
plugs from both
units
procedure
Test system
functions
Remove from rack
or wall.
Place on
static-free surface
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 231
Special tools
Before you replace the components, ensure you have the following equipment:
•
•
•
Phillips screwdriver #2, with a blade 3.5 in. long
3/16 inch slot screwdriver
antistatic wrist grounding strap
Warning: You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling
electronic components. Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment.
Performing a system shutdown
If there is a need to perform maintenance, the system may already be powered down. If this is the
If the system is still operating, perform the following procedures:
•
•
To shut down the system software
1
2
Check for a recent backup of the BCM system programming.
If there is no recent backup, use Element Manager to back up the system data. For information
about backing up the system data, refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide.
3
4
5
In Element Manager, from the Administration tab, click the Utilities folder to expand it.
From the Utilities folder, select Reset.
Click Shutdown System to prepare the system for power disconnect.
This action will stop all services. All Element Manager sessions will be disconnected from the
system. The BCM system can be restored to service only by powering the BCM system off
and back on again.
6
7
Click Ok.
The progress update dialog box appears and the BCM system begins the shutdown process.
When the shutdown process is complete, the final warning dialog box appears, and the LEDs
enter the flashing state.
Click Ok to disconnect Element Manager.
When the shutdown Element Manager is disconnected, the system gives an audible beep. The
LEDs remain in the flashing state until the hardware is shutdown (see “To shut down the
If the system hardware is not shutdown within about 15 minutes, it automatically boots up
again.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
To shut down the system hardware
Warning: Remove all of the connections to the BCM system before you power down the
system.
Failure to disconnect lines before you power down the system can cause damage to the
system.
1
Remove the DS256 cables from the front of the BCM main unit and, if present, the expansion
unit. This includes the data connections on the MSC.
Mark the cables to ensure correct reconnection.
Warning: You must disconnect power from the main unit after you have performed an
Element Manager shutdown. The main unit cannot start operating again until after power
has been disconnected and then reconnected.
2
3
4
Turn off the power switch located at the back of the BCM main unit and expansion unit.
Disconnect the BCM main unit and expansion unit power cords from the AC outlet.
Ensure you have room to access the part you are working on. Remove the BCM main unit
from the rack, if necessary.
Restarting the system after maintenance
When you finish your shutdown maintenance procedure, restart the BCM system in the order
described in this section.
To restore the system to operation
1
Ensure that all cables inside the housing are connected snugly to the correct boards, and excess
cables are bundled neatly, out of the way.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Replace the bezel on the BCM main unit, if you removed it.
Replace the main unit top cover and replace the screws.
If you removed the BCM main unit from the rack or wall, replace it.
Plug the expansion unit, if there is one, into the AC power source.
Plug the BCM main unit into the AC power source.
Turn on the power switch on the BCM main unit.
The BCM system starts booting.
Warning: When you restart the system, all IP clients, voice mail, and VoIP ports are not
available until the system services restart.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 233
8
Replace all the connectors to the front of the units. The reboot can take several minutes to
complete.
Base function tray maintenance procedures
The base function tray contains the core processing components. To prepare for base function tray
removal, perform a software and hardware shutdown (see “Performing a system shutdown” on
page 231).
Use this procedure only under the following conditions:
•
•
to replace the MSC, modem, memory DIMMs, battery, PEC III, or WAN (if applicable)
to replace the base function tray. Remove the components from the old base function tray and
install them in the replacement base function tray.
Danger: Electrical shock warning. Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and
network cables before opening the computer. Read and follow installation instructions
carefully.
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement parts. Contact your account
representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
Figure 105 Base function tray replacement overview
Do a
software
shutdown
Replace
No
No
Replace a
card?
different
component?
Perform BCM
maintenance setup
Yes
Yes
Remove the base
function tray
Remove the
old card.
See correct
replacement
procedure
Install the
new card
Replace
No
the base
function
tray?
Yes
Remove all cards.
Insert the base
function tray
Re-install all
cards
Restore unit to
operation
Check LEDs
END
Removing the base function tray
This procedure describes how to remove the base function tray to perform maintenance or
replacement activities.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray. Do not forcefully
remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 235
To remove the base function tray
1
2
3
4
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
5
6
7
8
Remove the base function tray latch screws and place them in a safe location.
Grasp the base function tray latches and partially remove the base function tray from the main
unit. Do not exert force on the DS30 cables or connectors.
9
Disconnect the DS30 cable connectors from the media services card. If necessary, remove the
Figure 106 Remove the base function tray
1
Unfasten base function tray
latch screws
Disconnect DS30 cables
from the MSC
4
Move base function tray latches to the
unlocked position
2
3
Slide base function tray partially
away from the main unit
10 Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit. Remove the base function tray
carefully to prevent damage to the cables and connectors.
11 Place the base function tray on a flat, clean, and static-free surface.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
To install the base function tray
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray. Do not forcefully
remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables.
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
3
4
5
6
Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position.
Position the base function tray in the correct main unit bay.
Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC. If necessary, install the WAN card (see “Installing
7
8
9
If required, install the base function tray bezel (see “To install the base function tray bezel” on
page 238).
Push the base function tray completely into the main unit. Be careful not to crimp the DS30
cables.
Move the base function tray latches to the locked position.
10 Install the base function tray latch screws.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 237
Figure 107 Install the base function tray
Connect DS30 cables to the
MSC
2
Insert base function tray completely. Move
base function tray latches to the locked
position
3
1
Slide base function tray partially
into the main unit
4
Fasten base function tray
latch screws
11 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face.
232.
13 Observe the system status monitor LEDs to ensure the base function tray initializes correctly.
To remove the base function tray bezel
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray. Do not forcefully
remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables.
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
3
4
Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
5
6
7
Remove the base function tray latch screws and place them in a safe location.
Grasp the base function tray latches and partially remove the base function tray from the main
unit. Do not exert force on the DS30 cables or connectors.
8
9
Unfasten the bezel screws from the base function tray face. Place the screws in a safe location.
Pull and tip the bezel away from the base function tray until the bezel clips are clear of the
base function tray chassis. Move the bezel in a downward direction between the base function
Figure 108 Remove the base function tray bezel
Tip bezel away from
base function tray
Bezel
2
Unfasten bezel
screws
1
3
Unhook bezel clips
from base function
tray
Move bezel downward
and between latches
4
To install the base function tray bezel
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the base function tray. Do not forcefully
remove or insert the base function tray because you could damage or stretch the cables.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 239
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
3
4
5
Remove the base function tray latch screws (if applicable). Place the screws in a safe location.
Move the base function tray latches to the unlocked position.
Position the bezel below and between the base function tray latches. Lift the bezel until the
bezel clips line up with the corresponding base function tray bezel holes.
6
Tilt the bezel forward, then push the bottom of the bezel into the base function tray to engage
the bezel clips.
7
8
Push on the face of the bezel so that it rests flush with the face of the base function tray.
Figure 109 Install the base function tray bezel
Push bezel against base
function tray
3
Install bezel
screws
4
2
Insert bezel clips into
base function tray
Position bezel between
latches and move upward
1
9
If required, install the base function tray in the main unit. Refer to “To install the base function
Advanced function tray maintenance procedures
This procedure applies only to the BCM400 system. This procedure describes how to remove and
install the advanced function tray in the main unit. Use this procedure for maintenance purposes.
The advanced function tray houses the hard disk or RAID components for the BCM400 system
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
Figure 110 Advanced function tray
Hard disk
Advanced function
tray latch
Hard disk cage
Advanced function
tray
Status LEDs
(RAID only)
Reset button
Bezel screw
Reserved bay
For information on how to replace the hard disk, refer to “Removing a hard disk cage from a
Danger: Electrical shock warning
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the BCM
main unit. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement. Contact your account representative
for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray. Do not
forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray because you could damage or
stretch the cables.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
tray.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 241
Figure 111 Advanced function tray replacement overview
If possible,
do a system
shutdown
Perform BCM
maintenance
setup
Insert the
advanced function
tray
Remove the
advanced function
tray
Restore unit to
operation
Remove hard
disk
Check LEDs
END
Install new hard
disk
To remove the advanced function tray
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray. Do not
forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray because you could damage or
stretch the cables.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Return to this step when complete.
4
5
6
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
location.
Move the advanced function tray latches to the unlocked position.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
7
Grasp the advanced function tray latches and partially remove the unit from the main unit. Do
not exert force on the hard disk power cables and connectors.
8
9
Disconnect hard disk power cable connectors.
Disconnect the IDE connector.
10 Remove the advanced function tray completely from the main unit.
11 Place the advanced function tray on a flat, clean, and static-free surface. If you need to remove
the hard disk component, refer to “Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced
Figure 112 Remove the advanced function tray
1
Unfasten advanced function
tray latch screws
Disconnect IDE cable from I/O
card
5
4
Disconnect power cables from the
hard disk or RAID card
Move advanced function tray latches to
the unlocked position
2
3
Slide advanced function tray partially away
from the main unit
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 243
To install the advanced function tray
Warning: Use care when removing or inserting the advanced function tray. Do not
forcefully remove or insert the advanced function tray because you could damage or
stretch the cables.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
3
4
Remove the advanced function tray latch screws. Place the screws in a safe location. If the
screws are already removed, skip to the next step.
5
6
7
8
Move the advanced function tray latches to the unlocked position.
Position the advanced function tray in the correct main unit slot.
Connect the hard disk power cable connectors. Use the first connector. Tuck any excess cable
under the hard disk.
9
Connect the IDE connector.
10 Push the advanced function tray completely into the chassis. Be careful not to crimp the cables
11 Move the advanced function tray latches to the locked position.
12 Install the advanced function tray latch screws.
232.
15 Observe the system status display LEDs to ensure the advanced function tray initializes
correctly.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
Figure 113 Install the advanced function tray
Connect IDE cable to I/O card
3
Connect power cables to the hard
disk or RAID card
2
Insert base function tray completely. Move
advanced function tray latches to the locked
position
4
1
Insert advanced
function tray
partially into the
main unit
5
Install advanced function
tray latch screws
Removing and installing the main unit top cover
Use the procedures in this section to either remove or install the top cover of the main unit. You
must remove the top cover to access the cabling or hardware components, such as the standard
power supply, I/O card, or backplanes.
Removing the main unit top cover
Use this procedure to remove the top cover of the BCM200 or BCM400 main unit. This procedure
assumes that you intend to perform maintenance activities. Do not operate the BCM main unit
with the top cover removed. Do not leave the top cover removed for extended periods of time.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades 245
To remove the main unit top cover
1
2
3
4
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
If required, remove the main unit from the server rack.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
5
6
7
Remove the two top cover screws located at the rear of the main unit. Place the screws in a
safe location.
Lift the back of the cover and slide rearward until it disengages from the main unit. Refer to
Lift the top cover up and away from the main unit. Place the cover in a safe location.
Figure 114 Remove the BCM200 top cover
2
Lift cover at rear
Remove the
top cover
screws
1
Slide cover open
3
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
Figure 115 Remove the BCM400 top cover
2
Main unit
top cover
Lift cover at rear
Remove thetop
cover screws
1
Slide cover open
3
Installing the main unit top cover
Use this procedure to install the top of the main unit cover. This procedure assumes that
maintenance or installation activities are complete and that you are ready to start the BCM system.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container or work area.
To install the main unit top cover
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
If required, remove the main unit from the server rack.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
4
5
6
7
Set the top cover on the main unit.
Slide the top cover forward until the cover engages with the main unit.
Install the two top cover screws at the rear of the main unit.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 Chapter 20 Preparing hardware for maintenance or upgrades
Figure 117 Install the BCM400 top cover
2
Press cover
down
Slide cover
into place
1
Install the top
3
cover screws
Using the backup and restore utility
The backup and restore utility (BRU) provides a means to preserve the integrity of your BCM
system operating system software and configuration data.
Use the BRU if you need to replace the following hardware:
•
•
Media Services Card (MSC) (see “Replacing data cards and processing hardware” on page
299)
Before you perform any substantial maintenance on the BCM system, save your data to a safe
storage module location elsewhere in the network. After hardware maintenance is complete,
restore the data to your BCM system. Access the BRU through the Element Manager main page.
For further instructions about how to operate the BRU, refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module 249
Chapter 21
Replacing a media bay module
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a media bay module (MBM).
Figure 118 provides an overview of the process for replacing MBMs.
Warning: This section describes replacing an MBM with the same type of MBM. If you
want to replace an MBM with a different type of MBM, you must treat it as a new
installation. Ensure the new MBM does not overrun any lines already assigned to other
MBMs.
Figure 118 Overview of MBM replacement process
Replacing
an MBM
Set DIP switches
on new MBM
Disconnect cables
from the front of
the main unit and
expansion unit
Monitor LEDs for
power and status
Check the MBM
settings in
Element Manager
Install new MBM
Replace bezel
Remove power
from both units
Remove front bezel
from expansion unit
Restore power to
main unit and
expansion unit
Remove MBM
Reconnect all
cables
Refer to the following procedures to replace an MBM:
•
•
•
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module
Removing an MBM
Use the procedures is this section to remove one or more MBMs from a BCM main unit or
expansion unit.
To remove an MBM
1
2
3
Remove any cabling from the MBM faceplate.
Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever with your thumb, index and middle fingers.
Pull outward to partially eject the MBM. Pull further on the lever to eject the MBM from the
4
Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM. Remove the MBM from the BCM unit (see
Figure 119 Remove a BCM200 MBM
Grasp the edge of the MBM
ejector lever and pull outward
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module 251
Figure 120 Remove a BCM400 MBM
Grasp the edge of the MBM
ejector lever and pull outward
Figure 121 Remove the expansion unit front bezel
BCM expansion unit
1. Push against the bottom
2. Pull out from the top
MBM latches
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 Chapter 21 Replacing a media bay module
Installing an MBM
After removing the old MBM, follow the steps in this section to install the new MBM.
To install an MBM
1
2
Set the DIP switches on the new MBM to match the settings of the old MBM.
Returning the system to operation
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 253
Chapter 22
Replacing the hard disk
This chapter describes how to replace the hard disks and hard disk cage assembly in the main unit.
The replacement procedures describe both the standard and RAID hard disk configurations.
For information on how to monitor and troubleshoot the hard disk in a standard or RAID
This chapter contains the following primary topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The hard disk is a core software and data storage component. For the BCM200 main unit, the hard
disk assembly installs at the rear of the main unit. For the BCM400 main unit, the hard disk
assembly installs in the advanced function tray.
Use the procedures described in this chapter under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
if you need to replace an existing hard disk in a standard configuration
if you need to upgrade to a RAID configuration
if you need to replace a hard disk in a RAID configuration
if you need to replace a RAID card
Remember to take suitable precautions when working inside the BCM system. Maintain a clean
and static-safe site.
Danger: Electrical shock warning
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the BCM
main unit. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Caution: Use only Nortel-approved replacement components. Contact your account
representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Note: Maintain a current backup of your system
When you replace the hard disk, you need to restore the BCM system programming from
the backup using the backup and restore utility (BRU). If you do not have a current
backup, you must reenter configuration data. For further information on how to perform a
backup or restore, refer to the BCM 4.0 Administration Guide.
Caution: Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk. You can
lose the information stored on the disk. Shock can damage the hard disk. Do not drop or
hit the hard disk drive.
Warning: You must remove all of the connections to the BCM main unit base function
tray before you power the system down. Failure to disconnect lines before power down
can cause damage to the system.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Figure 122 provides an overview of the hard disk replacement process.
Figure 122 Hard disk replacement overview
If possible, do
a software
shutdown
Restore unit to
operation
Set up unit for
maintenance
Remove the hard
disk and replace
with new disk
Perform system
initialization and a
BRU data restore
Test all functions
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 255
Installing a RAID system
Use this procedure to upgrade an existing standard BCM200 or BCM400 single disk configuration
to a RAID configuration.
To install a RAID system
1
2
3
4
Obtain the correct RAID field redundancy or upgrade components.
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface on the BCM main unit.
5
6
If applicable, remove the standard configuration hard disk cage from the BCM200 main unit
Remove the original programmed hard disk from the standard hard disk cage. Install and use
the original programmed hard disk as the primary disk in the RAID configuration (see Figure
Caution: Use only Nortel-approved replacement components. Contact your account
representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
7
Install the RAID hard disk cage in your system. For further information, refer to “Installing a
8
9
Install the main unit cover and access panel (if required).
Restore the BCM system to operation (see “Restarting the system after maintenance” on page
232).
After bootup, the system automatically detects the presence of a RAID configuration and
begins the disk initialization and mirroring process. For further information on how to monitor
Note: RAID disk mirroring can take up to 3 hours to complete. The BCM system
continues to operate normally during the disk mirroring process. However, because disk
mirroring occupies computing resources, Nortel recommends that you perform disk
mirroring during a period of low call traffic.
Nortel recommends that you perform any system reboot only as required and at the
beginning of the disk mirroring process.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Note: If this is the first time installation of the RAID upgrade, both Primary and Mirror
status LEDs are green.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 257
Replacing a RAID configuration hard disk
Use this procedure to replace a faulty disk in an existing RAID configuration.
To replace a RAID configuration hard disk
1
If you still have access to Element Manager, monitor the RAID hard disk activity status.
Diagnose hard disk fault conditions and perform maintenance activities if required. For further
2
Determine if any of the RAID hard disks require replacement. If you determine a RAID disk is
faulty, continue to step 3. If you determine no fault exists in the hard disks, you do not need to
replace a hard disk.
3
4
5
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface on the BCM main unit.
6
7
Remove the RAID hard disk cage from the main unit or advanced function tray. Refer to
Remove the faulty hard disk (primary or mirror). Refer to “Removing a primary hard disk
8
Install a new hard disk to replace the faulty hard disk. For further information, refer to
“Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage” on page 265. Ensure the hard disk cables connect
to the correct hard disk (see caution).
Caution: Use only Nortel-approved replacement components. Contact your account
representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Caution: It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard
disks. Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk. Connect the mirror
IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk.
9
Install the RAID hard disk cage in your system. For further information, refer to “Installing a
232).
After bootup, the system automatically detects the presence of a RAID configuration and
begins the disk initialization and mirroring process.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Note: RAID disk mirroring takes up to 3 hours to complete. The BCM system continues
to operate normally during the disk mirroring process. However, because disk mirroring
occupies computing resources, Nortel recommends that you perform disk mirroring during
a period of low call traffic.
Note: If this is the first time installation of the RAID configuration, both primary and
mirror status LEDs are green.
Removing a hard disk cage
Use the procedures in this section to remove a hard disk cage from either the BCM200 or BCM400
system. When a hard disk causes problems or fails, remove the hard disk cage from the BCM200
main unit or the BCM400 main unit. Remove the hard disk cage for RAID upgrades, or for hard
disk or RAID card replacement conditions.
For information on how to determine if you have a faulty hard disk, refer to “Monitoring standard
This section provides the following procedures for removing a hard disk cage from the BCM200
and BCM400 main unit.
•
•
Warning: Maintain a current backup of your system configuration on a separate backup
network server. Restore the current backup configuration data to a replacement hard disk.
For further information on how to perform a backup and restore, refer to the BCM 4.0
Administration Guide.
Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit
Use this procedure to remove a standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage from the BCM200
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 259
To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM200 main unit
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface on the BCM main unit.
4
Access the hard disk from a panel at the rear of the BCM200 main unit. Remove the hard disk
location.
5
6
If accessible, remove the BCM200 main unit top cover (see “Removing the main unit top
Place your fingers under the tab located at the bottom rear of the hard disk cage. Lift firmly on
the unit detaches from the mounting points on the chassis.
7
8
Slide the hard disk cage through the access panel and out of the main unit. Do not place strain
the hard disk IDE or power cables.
Disconnect the hard disk from the system:
a
b
Disconnect the power supply connector from the hard disk.
Disconnect the IDE connector from the hard disk (or RAID card).
Figure 123 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM200 main unit
Slide the hard disk cage
toward the rear of the
chassis
3
Remove access panel
1
2
Lift hard disk cage tab
9
Remove the hard disk cage completely from the BCM200 main unit. Place the hard disk cage
on a flat, clean and static-free surface.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Removing a hard disk cage from a BCM400 advanced function tray
Use this procedure to remove the BCM400 standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage from
the BCM400 advanced function tray. See also “Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage” on
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove a hard disk cage from a BCM400 main unit
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface on the BCM400 main unit.
4
Partially remove the BCM400 advanced function tray (see “To remove the advanced function
tray” on page 241). Do not to pinch or stretch any cables when sliding the advanced function
tray partially out of the main unit.
5
6
Locate the hard disk or RAID cage in the advanced function tray.
Disconnect the hard disk cables from the system:
a
b
Disconnect the power supply connector from the hard disk.
Disconnect the IDE connector from the hard disk (or RAID card).
7
Carefully remove the advanced function tray completely from the main unit. Do not pinch or
stretch any cables when sliding the advanced function tray away from the main unit.
8
9
Remove the transportation hard disk cage restraint screw and keep it in a safe place.
Place the advanced function tray on a flat, static-free surface.
10 Place your fingers under the tab located at the bottom rear of the hard disk cage. Firmly lift the
unit detaches from the mounting points on the advanced function tray.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 261
Figure 124 Detach the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis
Slide the hard disk cage toward the rear
of the advanced function tray chassis
2
Lift hard disk cage tab
1
11 Remove the hard disk cage from the BCM400 advanced function tray chassis. Place the hard
disk cage on a flat, clean and static-free surface.
Installing a hard disk cage
Use the procedures in this section to install a standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage into a
BCM200 or BCM400 system. Install the hard disk cage in the BCM after RAID upgrade, or in a
hard disk or RAID card replacement conditions.
This section describes the following procedures:
•
•
Warning: You must initialize the BCM system when you install a new hard disk on a
single-disk system (see “Initializing the hard disk in a single-disk configuration” on page
273).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM200 main unit
Use this procedure to install the standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage into the BCM200
main unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a hard disk cage
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface on the BCM main unit.
3
4
If accessible, remove the main unit top cover (see “Removing the main unit top cover” on page
244).
You can access the hard disk location from a panel at the rear of the main unit. Remove the
location.
5
Install the hard disk cage in the BCM200 main unit.
a
b
Insert the hard disk cage through the hard disk access panel in the back of the BCM200.
Position the hard disk cage in front of the cage chassis mounting points. The hard disk
cage lift tab is at the rear of the hard disk cage.
c
chassis. You will hear a snap as the hard disk cage locking tab slips into position.
6
Reconnect power and IDE cables to the hard disk and connect the hard disk to the system:
a
b
Connect the IDE ribbon cable connector to the hard disk (or RAID card) IDE interface.
Connect the power supply to the hard disk.
Caution: It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard
disks. Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk. Connect the mirror
IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk.
Note: All connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly.
If you cannot push a connector in easily, do not force it. Examine the connector before
attempting to install the cable to determine the correct orientation.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 263
Figure 125 Insert the hard disk cage into the BCM200 main unit
Slide the hard disk cage
toward the front of the
main unit.
7
8
Replace the cover (if applicable) and access panel.
Restore the BCM system to operation. Refer to “Restarting the system after maintenance” on
9
If you installed a new programmed hard disk in a standard configuration (for RAID
configuration, skip to the next step):
a
Initialize the hard disk. Refer to “Initializing the hard disk in a single-disk configuration”
b
After the disk is initialized, restore your data from your backups. If you did not back up
10 If you installed a new blank hard disk (mirror or primary) in a RAID, wait for the disk mirror
process to complete. For further information on how to monitor disk mirroring progress, refer
Installing a hard disk cage in a BCM400 main unit
Use this procedure to install the standard or RAID configuration hard disk cage into the BCM400
advanced function tray.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a hard disk cage
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power source.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
3
Install the hard disk in the hard disk cage (see “Installing a hard disk into a standard
271).
4
5
Position the hard disk cage in front of the cage chassis mounting points in the advanced
function tray. The hard disk cage lift tab is at the rear of the hard disk cage. If you are
installing a RAID, the LEDs point to the front of the advanced function tray.
chassis mounting points in the advanced function tray.
Figure 126 Insert the hard disk cage into the BCM400 advanced function tray
Lift and slide the hard disk cage toward
the front of the advanced function tray
Insert hard disk cage
6
7
Partially insert the advanced function tray into the BCM400 main unit. Ensure you do not
pinch any cables against the chassis or internal components.
Connect the hard disk (or RAID) to the system:
a
b
Connect the hard disk (or RAID card) to the IDE ribbon cable.
Connect the power supply to the hard disk.
Caution: It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard
disks. Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk. Connect the mirror
IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk.
Note: All connectors have a notch that allows you to align the connectors correctly.
If you cannot push a connector in easily, do not force it. Examine the connector before
attempting to install the cable to determine the correct orientation.
8
Slide the advanced function tray completely into the BCM400 main unit (see “To install the
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 265
9
Restore the BCM system to operation. Refer to “Restarting the system after maintenance” on
10 If you installed a new programmed hard disk in a standard configuration (for RAID
configuration, skip to the next step):
a
Initialize the hard disk. Refer to “Initializing the hard disk in a single-disk configuration”
b
After the disk is initialized, restore your data from your backups. If you did not back up
11 If you installed a new blank hard disk (mirror or primary) in a RAID, wait for the disk mirror
process to complete. For further information on how to monitor disk mirroring progress, refer
Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage
Use the procedures in this section to remove or install the hard disk in the hard disk cage for the
standard and RAID upgrade BCM200 and BCM400 configurations.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Refer to the following detailed information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removing a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk cage
Use this procedure to remove the hard disk from the hard disk cage for the standard BCM200 and
BCM400 system. Use this procedure only to replace a faulty hard disk.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
To remove a hard disk from a standard configuration hard disk
cage
1
Remove the standard hard disk cage from the main unit (see “Removing a hard disk cage” on
page 258).
2
Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the standard hard disk cage (see
Figure 127). Place the retainer screws in a safe location.
3
4
Place the hard disk on a flat, clean and static-free surface.
Figure 127 Remove the hard disk from the standard hard disk cage
BCM200 Hard disk cage
IDE connector and hard disk
cage lift tab are at opposite
ends
Remove the hard disk retainer screws
Remove hard disk from the hard disk cage
1
2
BCM400 Hard disk cage
IDE connector and hard disk
cage lift tab are at the same
end
Removing a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage
Use this procedure to remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage for the
BCM200 and BCM400 system. Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty hard disk. If a
primary hard disk fails, the mirror hard disk assumes control and service remains uninterrupted.
Nortel recommends that you replace the failed primary hard disk to retain full redundancy.
Replace the failed primary hard disk during a period of low call traffic.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 267
To remove a primary hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage
1
Remove the RAID hard disk cage from the main unit (see “Removing a hard disk cage” on
page 258).
2
3
Disconnect the hard disk IDE connector from the primary hard disk.
Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the RAID hard disk cage (see Figure
128). Place the retainer screws in a safe location.
4
Figure 128 Remove the primary hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage
Remove the primary hard disk
retainer screws
Disconnect the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable from
the primary hard disk IDE connector
2
1
BCM400 RAID shown
Mirror hard disk ribbon cable
Primary hard disk ribbon cable
Remove the primary hard disk from
the hard disk cage
3
5
Place the primary hard disk on a flat, clean, and static-free surface.
Removing a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage
Use this procedure to remove the mirror hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200
and BCM400 system. Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty mirror hard disk.
Nortel recommends that you replace the failed mirror hard disk to retain full redundancy. Replace
the failed mirror hard disk during a period of low call traffic. If you choose to remove both the
primary and mirror hard disks from the hard disk cage, place an identifying mark on the primary
hard disk to ensure correct installation.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
To remove a mirror hard disk from a RAID hard disk cage
1
Remove the RAID hard disk cage from the main unit (or advanced function tray) (see
2
3
Disconnect the hard disk IDE connectors from the mirror hard disk and RAID card.
Unscrew the hard disk retainer screws from both sides of the RAID hard disk cage (see Figure
129). Lift the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable to access the retainer screw. Place the retainer
screws in a safe location.
4
Figure 129 Remove the mirror hard disk from the RAID hard disk cage
Disconnect the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable
from the hard disk and RAID card
Disconnect the mirror hard disk retainer screws
1
2
to access the hard disk
retainer screws
3
Slide the mirror hard disk out from
the hard disk cage
BCM400 RAID shown
5
Place the hard disk on a flat, clean, and static-free surface.
Installing a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk cage
Use this procedure to install a single hard disk into a hard disk cage for a standard BCM200 or
BCM400 system.
Caution: Use only Nortel-approved replacement components. Contact your account
representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Caution: It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard
disks. Connect the primary IDE ribbon cable to the primary hard disk. Connect the mirror
IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 269
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a hard disk into a standard configuration hard disk
cage
1
Position the hard disk into the bottom position of the hard disk cage.
Note: For a BCM200 system, orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors
For a BCM400 system, orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on
the bottom and on the same side as the hard disk cage lift tab.
2
Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes. Fasten the hard disk cage retainer
Figure 130 Install a single hard disk in the standard configuration hard disk cage
Insert the hard disk into the
hard disk cage
BCM200 shown
1
Rear view
Front view
Align and install the
hard disk retainer
screws
Hard disk
cage lift
tab
2
IDE connector
Power supply
connector
Note: Install the BCM200 hard disk so that the IDE and power
connectors are opposite to the hard disk cage lift tab
Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage
Use this procedure to install a primary hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200 or
BCM400 system. Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty primary hard disk or install a
programmed hard disk from a standard configuration.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Nortel recommends that you replace a failed primary hard disk to retain full redundancy. Replace
the failed primary hard disk during a period of low call traffic.
Caution: Use only Nortel-approved replacement components. Contact your account
representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Note: For a RAID upgrade kit, the mirror disk and primary disk IDE ribbon cables are
preinstalled. If applicable, install the programmed hard disk from your single disk system
Note: For a BCM200 system, orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors
For a BCM400 system, orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on
Note: The hard disk storage capacity (in MB) for both primary and mirror hard disks must
be identical. Equipment provided by Nortel assures correct hard disk capacity
requirements.
To install a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage
1
2
Position the primary hard disk into the top position of the RAID hard disk cage.
Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes. Fasten the hard disk cage retainer
3
Connect the correct primary IDE ribbon cable connector to the primary hard disk.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 271
Figure 131 Install a primary hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage
Install the programmed (primary) hard disk into
the hard disk cage
Install the hard disk retaining screws
1
2
Rear view
Primary hard
disk IDE
ribbon cable
3
Connect the primary hard
disk IDE ribbon cable to the
primary hard disk
Mirror hard disk
IDE ribbon cable
Note: Do not unfold the hard disk IDE ribbon cables
Installing a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage
Use this procedure to install the mirror hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage for the BCM200
and BCM400 systems. Use this procedure if you need to replace a faulty mirror hard disk.
Nortel recommends that you replace a failed mirror hard disk to retain full redundancy. Replace
the failed mirror hard disk during a period of low call traffic. If you choose to remove both the
primary and mirror hard disks from the hard disk cage, place an identifying mark on the primary
hard disk to ensure correct installation.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Note: For a RAID upgrade kit, the mirror disk and primary disk IDE ribbon cables are
preinstalled. If applicable, install the programmed hard disk from your single disk system
Note: For a BCM200 system, orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors
For a BCM400 system, orient the hard disk so that the power and IDE connectors are on
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
Note: The hard disk storage capacity (in MB) for both hard disks must be identical.
Equipment provided by Nortel assures correct hard disk capacity requirements.
To install a mirror hard disk into a RAID hard disk cage
1
2
Install the mirror hard disk into the bottom position of the RAID hard disk cage.
Align the hard disk and hard disk cage retaining screw holes. Fasten the hard disk cage retainer
Figure 132 Install a mirror hard disk into the RAID hard disk cage
Install the mirror hard disk into the bottom
position of the hard disk cage
Install the mirror hard disk retainer screws
2
1
BCM400 RAID shown
Install and connect the mirror hard disk IDE
ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk and RAID
card.
3
3
4
Install and connect the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk and RAID
card. Retain the folds in the mirror hard disk IDE ribbon cable. Ensure you connect the mirror
hard disk to the correct RAID IDE connector.
If you removed the primary disk, see “Installing a primary hard disk into a RAID hard disk
cage” on page 269. Install and connect the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable to the RAID
card. Retain the folds in the primary hard disk IDE ribbon cable. Ensure you connect the
primary hard disk to the correct RAID IDE connector.
Caution: It is vital that you connect the correct IDE ribbon cables to the correct hard
disks. Connect the primary ribbon cable to the primary hard disk. Connect the mirror
ribbon cable to the mirror hard disk
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk 273
Initializing the hard disk in a single-disk configuration
The BCM system is normally initialized prior to shipment. If you replace the hard disk in a
standard single-disk system, the BCM system initializes the hard disk automatically to the default
values for network parameters, time zone, and market profile. After auto-initialization, you can
change the default values (see “To initialize the hard disk in a single disk configuration” on page
273).
To initialize a RAID configuration, refer to “Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration” on
For further information on how to replace a hard disk in a standard configuration, refer to
“Replacing a hard disk in the hard disk cage” on page 265. For further information on how to
After initialization, you should restore the configuration data to the BCM. Use the backup and
restore utility (BRU) to restore configuration data (see “Using the backup and restore utility” on
page 248). Nortel recommends that you maintain a current configuration backup. If you do not
have a current backup, enter the configuration data manually.
Note: When you replace a hard disk, IP configuration data is lost. The BCM system IP
address defaults to 10.10.10.1.
To initialize the hard disk in a single disk configuration
1
After the BCM system reboots, the system initializes the hard disk automatically and restores
the default values.
2
To change the default values of the configuration parameters, perform the following tasks:
a
Use the configuration menu to change the system IP address or perform other basic
b
Manually enter the values of the configuration parameters for your system (see
3
Restore system and data information (except Telephony and Registry) from your backup data.
For information on how to restore data to your system from a backup, see “Using the backup
Initializing the hard disk in a RAID configuration
After replacing either of the hard disks in a RAID configuration, the new hard disk is initialized
automatically when the system is restarted. You do not need to perform specific initialization
procedures.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 Chapter 22 Replacing the hard disk
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 275
Chapter 23
Replacing or upgrading a power supply
The BCM200 uses a standard power supply. The BCM400 and expansion units use either a
standard or redundant power supply.
This chapter describes the following power supply installation and replacement techniques:
•
•
Note: For the BCM400 RFO configuration only, a redundant power supply is included.
Use a redundant fan with the redundant power supply (see “Installing a BCM400 cooling
Warning: You must remove all of the connections to the BCM system before you power
the system down. Failure to disconnect the lines before you power down the system can
cause damage to the system.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Replacing a standard power supply
This section describes how to remove and install a standard power supply in the main unit and
contains the following procedures:
•
•
•
•
If the main unit or expansion unit has a standard power supply that fails, then all activity on the
system stops. This procedure describes how to replace a failed standard power supply unit. Figure
133 provides an overview of the process for replacing a standard power supply.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Figure 133 Standard power supply replacement overview
System down
Set up unit for
maintenance
Disconnect
power supply
cables. Note
Install new power
supply
cable routing
Restore unit to
operation
Remove failed
power supply
Reconnect power
supply cables
Check power LED
Check
connections
Removing a BCM200 power supply
If the standard power supply fails, the system is down. Use this procedure to remove the standard
power supply from a BCM200 main unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Warning: Power supply cable management is critical. Loose or incorrectly positioned
cables can result in cable damage.
To remove the BCM200 power supply
1
2
Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray. Disconnect the main unit and the
expansion unit (if applicable) from the AC power connection.
3
4
5
Remove the top cover from the main unit (see “Removing the main unit top cover” on page
244).
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
Locate and disconnect the power supply cables from the I/O card, media bay backplane, and
hard disk.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 277
6
7
8
Disconnect all cables from the I/O card.
Remove the screws that secure the MSC guide bracket to the I/O card. Place the MSC guide
Figure 134 Remove the BCM200 MSC guide bracket
Unfasten BCM200
MSC guide bracket
mounting screws
BCM200 MSC guide bracket
I/O Card
9
in a safe location.
10 Remove the I/O card from the main unit. Place the I/O card in a safe, clean, and static-free
location.
Note: Power supply and hard disk cables run underneath the I/O card. Remember the
location and position of the power supply and hard disk cables. You will need to route the
cables in the same manner when you reinstall the power supply.
Figure 135 Remove the I/O card from the BCM200 main unit
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Place the screws in a safe location.
Figure 136 Remove the BCM200 power supply screws
12 Separate the power supply cable from the hard disk cable. Cut the tie-wrap that secures the
13 Remove the power supply from the interior of the main unit.
Note: Remove the power supply carefully. Ensure the power supply cables are not
entangled or connected to any internal components.
Installing a BCM200 standard power supply
Use this procedure to install a functional standard power supply in a BCM200 main unit. The I/O
card must be removed from the main unit before you perform this procedure. The base function
tray must be partially removed.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Warning: Power supply cable management is critical. Loose or incorrectly positioned
cables can result in cable damage.
To install a BCM200 standard power supply
1
2
Obtain and use only the power supply recommended by Nortel.
Place the new power supply into the main unit.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 279
Note: Install the power supply carefully. Ensure the power supply cables are not
entangled or crushed against any internal components.
3
Secure the power supply to the main unit. Align the power supply mounting holes with the
over-tighten the power supply mounting screws.
Figure 137 Install the BCM200 power supply chassis screws
4
Run the P4, P5, or P6 power supply cable and the IDE cable to the hard disk. The I/O card is
not installed in the main unit for this step:
a
b
c
Route the power cable between the I/O card chassis standoffs in the area shown (see
Figure 138). Run the IDE cable in the same manner.
Tie-wrap the power cable to the hard disk cable. Position the tie-wrap 1/2 inch from the
hard disk cable sheathing.
Ensure the remainder of the power cable does not interfere with internal components.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Figure 138 Power and hard disk cable routing
Media bay module backplane
Tie-wrap location P4, P5, P6 +
hard disk cable 1/2” from
hard disk cable sheathing
MSC
I/O card
standoffs
1/2”
P4, P5, P6 power
cable
IDE (hard
disk) cable
MSC
bracket
standoffs
Power supply
Hard disk
I/O card
standoffs
Fan
5
cables. Ensure the cables maintain their position as shown in the previous step.
Figure 139 Install the I/O card in the BCM200 main unit
6
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 281
Figure 140 Install the BCM200 MSC guide bracket
Fasten BCM200
MSC guide bracket
mounting screws
BCM200 MSC guide bracket
I/O Card
7
Connect a P1 power cable to the media bay backplane connector. Tie-wrap the excess cable as
Figure 141 Tie-wrap excess P1 power cable length
Media bay module backplane
MSC
P1 cable
P1 cable
tie-wrap
I/O card
Power supply
Hard disk
Fan
8
9
Connect the hard disk cable to the secondary IDE I/O card connection. Connect the hard disk
cable to the hard disk connector. Connect the power connector to the hard disk (see Figure
141). Insert extra connectors under the hard disk.
Connect the 20-pin motherboard power cable (P1) and the +12v power cable (P9) to the I/O
card.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
10 Loop the cables together and tie-wrap to the side of the power supply to remove P1, P9, P3,
P7/8 excess cable length. Fold the cables to the rear of the main unit and secure with a
tie-wrap. Ensure the cables are tied far enough back so they do not interfere with the insertion
of the base function tray.
11 Attach the fan plug to the I/O card Fan #1 connection. Loop excess fan cable length under the
I/O card.
Note: Verify the power supply cables are connected correctly and do not interfere with
any internal components.
12 Insert the base function tray fully into the main unit. Ensure the base function tray does not
interfere with any cabling.
14 Press the power supply switch to the ON position (if applicable). Plug the BCM power cord
into an AC power outlet.
maintenance” on page 232. The BCM system starts when you connect the AC power cord.
Wait for the start-up process to finish.
Table 83 Power supply LED
LED
Green
Green
Green
Label Description
LED On LED Flash Red LED On (Only)
LED Off
Indicates state of system
power.
OK
N/A
A minimum of 1 PS needs
attention.
N/A
a
b
c
If the BCM system does not power up, press the reset button on the base function tray
front panel.
If the Power LED is red and does not respond to a manual reset, this indicates a faulty
power condition. Contact your Nortel representative.
If the Power LED is green, the system is operating normally.
Removing a BCM400 standard power supply
Use this procedure to remove the standard power supply from a BCM400 main unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 283
Warning: Power supply cable management is critical. Loose or incorrectly positioned
cables can result in cable damage.
To remove a BCM400 standard power supply
1
2
3
Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray.
Disconnect the main unit and the expansion unit (if applicable) from the AC power
connection.
4
5
Remove the top cover from the main unit (see “Removing the main unit top cover” on page
244).
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
6
7
8
9
Disconnect all cables from the I/O card.
Locate and disconnect the power supply cables from the media bay backplane and hard disk.
Unfasten the power supply cable clamp located on the underside of the main unit top cover
the main unit.
Place the screws in a safe location.
Figure 142 Remove the BCM400 power supply screws
Unfasten cable
clamp - located
on underside of
cover
Unfasten power
supply mounting
screws
Unfasten exterior
power supply support
bracket mounting
screws
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
143). Place the screws in a safe location.
12 Remove the power supply and support bracket out and away from the BCM400 main unit.
Figure 143 Remove the power supply and support bracket
Remove the power
2
supply and support
bracket from main unit
Cut the cable
3
tie-wrap away from
the power supply
support bracket.
Remove power
supply
1
Remove exterior and interior power supply support
bracket mounting screws (power supply not shown) -
Remove power supply support bracket
13 Remove the tie-wrap from the power supply support bracket. Place the power supply in a safe,
static-free location.
Installing a BCM400 standard power supply
Use this procedure to install a functional standard power supply in a BCM400 main unit. The base
function and advanced function trays must be partially removed.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Warning: Power supply cable management is critical. Loose or incorrectly positioned
cables can result in cable damage.
To install a BCM400 standard power supply
1
2
3
Ensure the new power supply is an auto-adjust power supply.
Insert a tie-wrap in the power supply support bracket lanclet.
Place the standard power supply (top down) on a flat surface. Place the power supply support
bracket on the bottom surface of the power supply.
4
Gather together and route the main card 20-pin power cable (P1) and the +12v power cable
(P9) at the tie-wrap.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 285
5
Secure the power cables to the power supply support bracket with the tie-wrap inserted in step
Figure 144 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables
Gather and route the power
cables at the tie-wrap
Insert a tie-wrap in
the power supply
support bracket
Place the support
bracket on the power
supply
4
3
2
Place power supply upside
down on flat surface
1
Secure the power cables to the
power supply bracket with the
tie-wrap
5
6
7
8
Insert the standard power supply and support bracket in the main unit. The power supply
support bracket rests on the MSC guide bracket on one side, and the chassis wall on the other.
Ensure the mounting holes in the power supply support bracket align with the holes in the
main unit.
Figure 145 Fasten the power supply support bracket to the main unit
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
9
Align the mounting holes in the power supply with the chassis holes at the rear of the main
Figure 146 Fasten the standard power supply to the main unit
Fasten power,
auxiliary, IDE
cables using
cable clamp -
located on
Fasten power
supply mounting
screws
underside of
cover
10 Attach the 20-pin motherboard connector and the +12V power connector into the I/O card.
11 Route the power cable, auxiliary, and IDE cables to the hard disk cage. Bundle the cables
12 Connect the power cable and IDE cable to the hard disk.
13 Run the auxiliary cable to the chassis cable slot (see the next step).
14 Connect cable runs P2 and P3 to the media bay backplane as follows.
a
b
c
Connect cable P2 into the bottom media bay module backplane power connector.
Connect cable P3 into the top media bay module backplane connector.
Bundle power cables P2 and P3 along with auxiliary cable (P7 or P8) together with a
d
Insert the P2, P3, and auxiliary cable into the cable slot on the chassis (secured with the
grommet).
Upgrading to a redundant power supply
Use the procedures in this section to upgrade a BCM400 main unit, currently equipped with a
standard power supply, with a redundant power supply. This section contains the following
procedures:
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 287
•
•
•
•
•
Figure 147 provides an overview of the steps required to upgrade your BCM400 system from a
standard power supply to a redundant power supply.
Note: A BCM expansion unit with a standard power supply cannot be upgraded. You
must replace the expansion unit.
Note: When you install a redundant power supply, you must also install a redundant
cooling fan included with the redundancy upgrade kit.
Note: When you install a redundant power supply, you must also remove the jumper
installed in the power supply unit status connector (RPS output signaling connector) on
the I/O card.
Figure 147 Redundant power supply upgrade overview
Insert both
modules into
power supply
cage
Install redundant
power supply
cage
Shut down the
system
Set up unit for
maintenance
Remove PSU
jumper
Restore unit to
operation
Note cable
routing. Remove
cables
Make internal
connections
Check power LED
Remove the
standard power
supply
Removing the PSU status connector jumper
Use this procedure if you are installing a redundant power supply for the first time. Use this
procedure only with the BCM400 main unit.
Note: When you upgrade to a redundant power supply, you must also install a redundant
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove the PSU status connector jumper
1
2
3
4
5
Disconnect the BCM400 system from the AC power outlet.
Remove the RPS output signaling connector jumper. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the jumper
out and away from the connector. Place the jumper in a safe location.
6
Figure 148 Remove the PSU status connector jumper
PSU Status
connector
Jumper
I/O Card
Installing a redundant power supply cage (BCM400 only)
This procedure describes how to install a redundant power supply cage in the BCM400 main unit.
After you install the redundant power supply cage in the main unit, install the two power supply
Note: When you upgrade to a redundant power supply, you must also install a redundant
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 289
Note: When you install a redundant power supply, you must also remove the jumper
installed in the PSU Status connector (RPS output signaling connector) on the I/O card.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a redundant power supply cage (BCM400 only)
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM400 system from the AC power outlet.
Remove the standard power supply from the main unit (see “Removing a BCM400 standard
4
5
Remove the power supply support bracket from the main unit (see “Removing a BCM400
bend and snap the tab away from the support bracket. Make sure you remove only the inner
adapter tab.
Figure 149 Remove the BCM400 power supply adapter tab from the support bracket
Remove the inner
adapter tab
6
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Figure 150 Remove the power supply knockout bracket
Rear view
Remove this bracket to
accommodate redundant
power supply
7
8
9
Remove both power supply modules from the redundant power supply cage before you install
Place the redundant power supply (top down) on a flat surface. Place the power supply support
bracket on the bottom surface of the power supply.
Insert a tie-wrap in the power supply support bracket lanclet.
10 Gather together and route the motherboard 20-pin power cable (P1), the +12v power cable
(P9), the 3.3v load cable (PB), and the PS monitor cable (PA) to the tie-wrap.
Figure 151 Fasten the power supply support bracket cables
Place the support
2
Gather and route the
cables to the tie-wrap
Insert a tie-wrap in the
power supply support
bracket
bracket on the power
supply
4
3
1
Place power supply top side
down on flat surface
Secure the cables to the
power supply bracket with
the tie-wrap
5
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 291
13 Position the redundant power supply cage in the main unit. Make sure the power supply
module tray opening faces the rear of the main unit.
14 Align the mounting holes in the redundant power supply cage with the screw holes in the main
unit.
15 Attach the redundant power supply cage to the main unit using the four chassis mounting
Figure 152 Attach the redundant power supply cage
Fasten power supply
mounting screws
17 Install a new cable clamp on the underside of the top cover. Place the new cable clamp beside
auxiliary cables to the roof of the main unit.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Figure 153 Install a new cable clamp
P3
Auxiliary
P2
Auxiliary
Mount new cable
clamp - located
on underside of
cover
Cable clamp - located
on top of power supply
18 Run the power supply, auxiliary, and IDE cables to the hard disk. Secure these cables in the
new cable clamp.
Note: Verify the power supply cables are connected correctly and are routed so they do
not interfere with any internal components when moved.
a
Bundle the cables together. Run the cables on the top of the power supply chassis and
secure with the cable clamp.
b
c
d
Connect cable P2 into the bottom media bay module backplane power connector.
Connect cable P3 into the top media bay module backplane connector.
Bundle power cables P2 and P3 along with auxiliary cable (P7 or P8) together with a
e
f
Insert the P2, P3, and auxiliary cable into the cable slot on the chassis (secured with the
grommet).
Ensure that one power run connects to one MBM backplane connector. Do not connect a
single power run to both MBM backplane connectors.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 293
Figure 154 Install a cable grommet
Insert the P2, P3
and auxiliary
cables into the
cable slot
Cable slot
Cable grommet
Removing a BCM400 redundant power supply cage
Use this procedure to remove an existing redundant power supply cage from the BCM400 main
unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove a BCM400 redundant power supply cage
1
2
3
Disconnect all cables from the front of the base function tray.
Disconnect the main unit and the expansion unit (if applicable), from the AC power
connection.
4
5
Remove the top cover from the BCM400 main unit (see “Removing the main unit top cover”
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
6
7
Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage. Do not completely
remove the power supply module.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
Warning: When the power is on, wait several seconds before removing the
power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete
electrical discharge.
8
9
Disconnect the power supply cables from the I/O card, media bay backplane, and hard disk.
Unfasten the cable clamp that holds the power and IDE cables in place. The cable clamp is
located under the top cover of the platform base chassis.
10 Run all cables to the rear exterior of the main unit.
Place the screws in a safe location.
Figure 155 Remove the BCM400 redundant power supply screws
Remove power supply
mounting screws
143). Place the screws in a safe location.
13 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket out and away from the
location.
Note: Remove the power supply carefully. Ensure the power supply cables are not
entangled or connected to any internal components.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 295
Figure 156 Remove the redundant power supply cage and support bracket
Remove the power
supply and support
bracket from main unit
2
3
Cut the cable tie-wrap
away from the power
supply support bracket.
Remove power supply
Unfasten the power supply
support bracket (power
supply not shown)
1
14 Cut the cable ties that hold the power cables to the power supply support bracket. Be careful
not to cut or damage the cable insulation.
Installing a power supply module
This procedure describes how to install power supply modules in the power supply cage. After you
install the redundant power supply cage in the main unit, insert the two power supply modules.
Use this procedure also to replace faulty power supply modules. Redundant power supply modules
can be exchanged while the system is running, as long as one of the modules remains active. This
section is relevant only with the BCM400 main unit.
Note: When you upgrade to a redundant power supply, you must also install a redundant
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a power supply module
1
Ensure you have the correct redundant power supply cage installed in the BCM400 main unit
2
Ensure that you position the power supply modules correctly before inserting them into the
power supply cage. The green LEDs are located at the top right of the power supply modules.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
3
Insert the power supply modules into the redundant power supply cage at the rear of the main
unit.
a
Push on the power supply module until the face of the module is flush with the casing.
You hear a click when the power supply module is properly seated.
b
Secure each module with the power supply locking nut (located on the right side of the
Figure 157 Install the power supply modules into the power supply cage
Power supply modules slide into the
power supply cage.
Fasten the power supply
module locking nut.
2
1
Push the power supply
module into the power
supply cage.
Figure 158 BCM400 main unit redundant power supply (rear view)
Power supply mounted in
the BCM400 redundant
feature option main unit
4
If you are installing the redundant power supply for the first time, restore the BCM400 system
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply 297
The BCM400 system starts up when you connect the AC power cord. If the system does not
start and the red Power LED is on, you may need to press the reset button on the base function
tray panel to start the system.
If you are replacing a single faulty power supply module, the BCM400 is already in operation.
The replacement power supply module powers up when fully and correctly inserted in the
redundant power supply cage.
5
Verify the LEDs on the power supply module are lit. Verify all LEDs on the base function tray
indicate the system functions correctly.
Removing a power supply module
Use this procedure for any of the following conditions:
•
Remove a single failed power supply module. A power supply module indicates a failure when
the green LED (located on the module) is not lit.
•
Remove power supply modules before you install a new power supply cage in the BCM400
Note: It is not necessary to remove power from the BCM400 main unit or expansion unit
to replace a single power supply module.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove a power supply module
1
Unfasten the power supply module locking nut. When the nut is fully unfastened, the nut
should move freely in the screw cage.
2
3
Swing the power supply module handle to a 90 degree angle to the power supply module.
Grasp the power supply module handle. With your thumb, compress the locking tab toward
the handle.
4
Pull the power supply module out of the power supply cage (see notes in this step).
•
If you are replacing a faulty power supply module, power down the power supply module.
Partially remove the power supply module from the power supply cage. Do not
completely remove the power supply module.
Warning: When the power is on, wait several seconds before removing the
power supply module completely from the power supply cage to ensure complete
electrical discharge.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 Chapter 23 Replacing or upgrading a power supply
•
If you are installing the redundant power supply for the first time, remove both power
supply modules from the redundant power supply cage. Remove the power supply
Figure 159 Remove the power supply module from the power supply cage
Rear view:
Power supply modules slide out of the power
supply cage.
Compress the locking
tab toward the handle
3
1
Unfasten the power supply
module locking nut
Lift the power supply
module handle
2
5
6
Place the power supply module on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
Repeat this step for any remaining power supply modules.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
299
Chapter 24
Replacing data cards and processing hardware
This section describes how to replace data cards and processing hardware components and
provides the following topics:
•
•
•
•
Warning: You must remove all of the connections to the BCM system before you power
the system down. Failure to disconnect lines before you power down the system can cause
damage to the system.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
The following are field replaceable units (FRUs) for the BCM200 and BCM400 systems:
•
•
•
•
•
Base function tray
Cards (WAN, MSC, modem)
Memory
PECs
Main card CMOS battery
Replacing cards
Use the procedures in this section to perform the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
•
•
•
•
Danger: Electrical shock warning.
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the
computer. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement. Contact your account representative
for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Figure 160 shows an interior view of the base function tray (looking forward). The illustration
the cards.
Figure 160 Base function tray interior components
WAN slot
MSC slot
PCI cover plate
Modem card
interface
PCI cover screw
PCI Riser
card
connectors
Modem
card
Main card
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 301
Figure 161 Card replacement overview
If possible, do
a software
shutdown
Perform BCM
maintenance
shutdown
Remove the base
function tray
Remove the old
card.
Install the new
card in the
same slot
Insert the base
function tray
Restore unit to
operation
Check LEDs
END
To remove the WAN card
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
1
2
3
4
5
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
6
Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit. Ensure you do not pinch, stretch, or
damage any cables. If required, remove the base function tray completely from the main unit
7
8
Remove the base function tray bezel. See “To remove the base function tray bezel” on page
237.
At the front of the base function tray, loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw (use a #2
screw in a safe location.
9
Remove the PCI cover plate from the base function tray. Place the PCI cover plate in a safe
location.
10 Use both hands to carefully hold the WAN card along the side edges. Push the WAN card
away from the PCI riser card connector.
Figure 162 Remove the WAN card and PCI cover plate
Remove the PCI cover
plate screw
PCI cover plate
1
2
1
Remove the WAN card
WAN card
2
11 Remove the WAN card from the base function tray. Place the card in a safe, static-free, and
clean location or container.
Installing the WAN card
Use this procedure to install a replacement WAN card.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 303
To install a replacement WAN card
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit. If required, remove the base
function tray completely from the main unit (see “Removing the base function tray” on page
234).
3
4
Remove the base function tray bezel (if applicable).
Insert the WAN card in the same PCI slot from which you removed the original card. Refer to
5
6
Push firmly on the WAN card until it sits completely in the top PCI riser card connector.
Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray
and cover plate screw holes align.
7
Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate. Tighten the PCI cover plate
Figure 163 Install the WAN card
Install the
WAN card
1
2
PCI cover plate
Install the PCI cover
plate
2
WAN card
1
8
9
Partially insert the base function tray in the main unit (see “To install the base function tray”
on page 236). Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables.
10 Move the base function tray latches to the locked position and install the latch screws.
11 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
The BCM system automatically initializes the new WAN card. You can configure the WAN card
to meet the needs of your system (in Element Manager: Configuration > Resources > Network
Interfaces).
To remove the media services card (MSC)
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Note: If you purchased optional BCM applications that require keycode activation,
regenerate the keycodes after you install the replacement MSC. For further information,
Note: If you need to install a new MSC, you must upload new core software from the hard
1
Ensure you have a current data backup of your system (see “Using the backup and restore
2
3
4
5
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Disconnect any cables from the front of the base function tray.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
6
Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit (see “Removing the base function
tray” on page 234). Do not exert force on the DS30 cables and connectors.
7
8
Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC.
Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit. Ensure you do not pinch or
function tray on a flat, clean, and static-free surface.
9
Remove the base function tray bezel. See “To remove the base function tray bezel” on page
237.
10 At the front of the base function tray, loosen and remove the PCI cover plate screw (use a #2
screw in a safe location.
11 Remove the PCI cover plate from the base function tray. Place the PCI cover plate in a safe
location.
12 Remove the two mounting screws that secure the MSC to the base function tray extension at
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 305
Figure 164 MSC mounting screws
PEC III slots
MSC mounting screws
MSC
Base function tray extension
13 Use both hands to carefully hold the card along the side edges. Push the card away from the
PCI riser card connector to disconnect the MSC.
14 Remove the MSC from the base function tray. Place the MSC on a flat, clean, and static-free
surface.
remove the processor expansion card (PEC)” on page 313). Place the PEC IIIs in a safe,
static-free location. Reuse the cards in a replacement MSC (see the procedure “To install the
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
To install the media services card (MSC)
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Note: If you purchased optional BCM applications that require keycode activation,
regenerate the keycodes after you install the replacement MSC. For further information,
Note: If you need to install a new MSC, you must upload core software from the hard
disk. If you reinstall the same MSC, the core software on the MSC is the most current
version and no core software upload is necessary.
Note: You require a current backup of your system data to restore the system after you
install the new MSC.
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the wall power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
3
4
5
Position the MSC in the correct PCI riser card connector.
Push the card firmly and fully into the PCI riser card connector. Ensure the lanclet tab on the
MSC PCI bracket aligns correctly with the lanclet slot on the base function tray.
6
7
Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray
and cover plate screw holes align.
8
Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate. Tighten the PCI cover plate
9
10 Partially install the base function tray in the main unit.
11 Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC.
12 Install the base function tray completely into the main unit. Be careful not to crimp the DS30
13 Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 307
15 Ensure the Status LED on the BCM main unit is solid green.
17 For a new MSC only: Upload the core software to the MSC:
a
b
c
d
In Element Manager, select Administration > Utilities > Reset
Click Cold Reset Telephony Services.
Select the Force MSC Core download checkbox.
Click Ok.
Note: If you removed and reinstalled the same MSC (for example, to replace the battery
on the main card), you do not need to upload core software from the hard disk.
18 Restore your telephony data from your backup data using the backup and restore utility (see
To remove the modem card
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
4
5
6
Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray.
Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit (See “Removing the base function
tray” on page 234). Do not exert force on the DS30 cables and connectors. Ensure you do not
pinch, stretch, or damage any cables.
7
8
Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC.
Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit. Ensure you do not pinch,
base function tray on a flat, clean, and static-free surface.
9
Remove the base function tray bezel. See “To remove the base function tray bezel” on page
237.
162). Place the PCI cover plate screw in a safe location.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
the PCI cover plate in a safe location.
Figure 165 Modem card (pin locking clip)
Compress modem
guide pin locking
Modem card
clip
Main card
16 Grasp the modem card edges with your fingertips. Carefully pull the modem card away from
the main card. Place the modem card in a clean, safe, and static-free location.
17 Disconnect the modem cable from the main card and RJ-11 interface.
18 Unfasten the modem RJ-11 interface screws. Place the screws in a safe location.
Figure 166 Modem card (positioning)
Base function tray
interior view
Modem RJ-11
interface
Modem RJ-11 interface
connection
Modem card
connection to
main card
Modem card
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 309
19 Unfasten the modem RJ-11 interface mounting screws. Place the screws in a safe location.
20 Remove the modem RJ-11 interface from the base function tray.
21 Carefully grasp the modem card guide pin and remove it. Place the pin in a safe location.
22 Remove the modem card.
Installing the modem card
Use this procedure to install a modem card in a base function tray. This procedure assumes the
base function tray is not installed in the main unit.
Note: Before you power down the system to remove the base function tray, confirm that
the CallPilot region of operation information is correct:
1
2
From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
Select Identification.
The System Identification screen appears.
3
Verify that the region setting is correct for your system.
If you must change the region, see “Using Element Manager to set the basic
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a modem card
1
2
Obtain a correct and functional modem kit.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
3
Remove the base function tray bezel. See “To remove the base function tray bezel” on page
237.
4
5
If required, remove the MSC card from the base function tray. See “To remove the media
6
If you are installing the modem card for the first time, locate the modem port label on the front
of the base function tray. Remove the modem port label if required and discard (see Figure
167).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
Figure 167 Modem port label
Remove modem port label
7
If applicable, install the modem card guide pin on the main card. Ensure the modem card guide
Figure 168 Modem card guide pin installation
Install the modem guide pin
into the main card
Modem guide pin
Main card
8
9
Carefully grasp the modem card with your fingertips.
Install the modem card in the correct location on the main card. Ensure the modem card pins
correctly align with the main card modem connectors and modem guide pin.
10 Gently push in a downward direction on the modem card with your fingertips. Ensure the
modem card seats correctly in the main card modem connectors.
11 If applicable, install the modem RJ-11 interface to the base function tray faceplate. Ensure the
12 If applicable, connect the RJ-11 modem card connector to the main card socket and the RJ-11
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 311
14 Install the two mounting screws that secure the MSC to the base function tray extension (at the
16 Partially install the base function tray in the main unit.
17 Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC.
18 Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray
and cover plate screw holes align.
19 Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate. Tighten the PCI cover plate
tray” on page 236). Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables.
22 Reinitialize your system.
Replacing the processor expansion card (PEC)
This section describes how to replace the processor expansion card (PEC) in the BCM200 and
BCM400 main units. This section contains the following procedures:
•
•
•
The BCM200 is equipped with one PEC III mounted on the media services card (MSC). The
BCM400 is equipped with two PEC IIIs mounted on the MSC. The PECs provide signal
processing capabilities for such applications as voice mail and IP telephony applications.
Figure 169 provides an overview of the process for replacing a PEC.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
Figure 169 PEC replacement overview
Ensure you
have a current
data backup.
Do a software
shutdown
Install the
PEC
Set up unit for
maintenance
Restore unit to
operation
Remove the top
cover
Test system
If required, remove
PEC module from
MSC
Warning:
Incorrect handling of the PEC during installation could result in loss of telephony
programming.
Danger: Electrical shock warning
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the
computer. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement. Contact your account representative
for the current list of approved replacement parts.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 313
To remove the processor expansion card (PEC)
Warning: Possible data loss
Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC. This
may cause shorting, which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming.
If a loss of memory or telephony programming occurs, complete the removal of the PEC,
and then restore the data from your backup medium upon reinstallation (see “Installing a
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
1
Ensure you have a current data backup of your system (see “Using the backup and restore
2
3
4
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
5
6
Completely remove the base function tray from the main unit (see “Removing the base
function tray” on page 234). Ensure you do not pinch, stretch, or damage any cables.
Grasp the top edge of the PEC you want to remove and it pull out. Place the PEC in a safe and
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
Figure 170 Remove the processor expansion card (PEC III)
Processor expansion card
Installing a processor expansion card (PEC)
When you replace or add PECs, ensure you follow the directions for shutting down the system.
Ensure you have a current data backup of your system. This procedure assumes the base function
tray is completely removed from the main unit.
Warning: Possible data loss
Ensure that you do not touch the PEC casing to any of the components on the MSC. This
may cause shorting, which can erase memory or cause a loss of telephony programming.
If this occurs, complete the installation of the PEC, and then restore the data from your
backup medium.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 315
To install a PEC
1
2
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
3
Decide which slot you are going to install the PEC into on the MSC. If you have more than
one card holder (BCM400), completely populate one card holder at a time.
4
5
Line the card up between the rails of the slot. Ensure the card label is face-up.
Note: Do not force the card into its slot. If the PEC does not slide in easily, check the
alignment.
Figure 171 Insert the processor expansion card (PEC III)
Processor expansion card
6
7
Completely insert the base function tray into the main unit (see “To install the base function
Restore the BCM system to operation. Refer to “Restarting the system after maintenance” on
Replacing memory
This section describes how to remove and install the random access memory card. This section
contains the following procedures:
•
•
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
The BCM system is equipped with 256 MB of random access memory (RAM). The memory
resides on a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) on the main card. The main card contains space
to add a second DIMM, or you can upgrade the existing DIMM.
Figure 172 provides an overview of the process for replacing or adding memory chips.
Figure 172 Memory replacement overview
Do a software
shutdown
Install a new DIMM
Set up unit for
maintenance
Restore unit to
operation
Remove the base
function tray
Test system
Pull DIMM off
motherboard
Danger: Risk of shock
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the
computer. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement. Contact your account representative
for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Increasing the amount of memory
To increase the amount of memory in the system, you can:
•
•
add another DIMM to the second DIMM slot.
replace current DIMM with a DIMM that contains more RAM.
Removing the dual in-line memory module (DIMM) card
Use this procedure to remove a DIMM when the circuit fails or when you want to increase the
amount of RAM in the BCM main unit.
Note: There must be at least one DIMM installed in the BCM main unit for the system to
function.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 317
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove a DIMM card
1
2
3
4
5
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
6
7
Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit. Ensure you do not pinch, stretch, or
damage any cables.
Remove the base function tray bezel. See “To remove the base function tray bezel” on page
237.
8
9
Detach the DS30 cable connectors from the MSC.
10 Remove the base function tray completely from the main unit. Ensure you do not pinch,
304).
12 Carefully push down on the fastening tabs on either side of the DIMM you want to remove. As
you press down on the fastening tabs, the DIMM lifts out of the DIMM slot.
13 Grasp both ends of the DIMM with your fingertips. Lift the DIMM up and away from the
Figure 173 Remove and replace the dual in-line memory module
Base function
tray - front
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
To install a DIMM card
Note: There must be at least one DIMM installed in the BCM main unit for the system to
function.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
1
2
Position and correctly align the new DIMM (edge connectors first) into the connector.
Note: The DIMM has two notches on the edge connector. Position the DIMM so
that one of the notches is on the side of the slot nearest to the BCM cards.
Carefully and firmly press down on the top of the DIMM card with your thumbs. At the same
time, use your index fingers to move the fastening tabs inward toward the card. When the card
is completely inserted in the connector, the fastening tabs clip to the side of the DIMM card.
Note: Do not force the DIMM into its slot. If the DIMM does not slide in easily,
check the alignment of the DIMM.
3
4
5
6
7
Partially install the base function tray in the main unit.
Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC.
Completely install the base function tray in the main unit (see “To install the base function
tray” on page 236). Ensure you do not pinch or damage any cables.
8
9
Insert all connectors in the correct locations on the base function tray face.
page 232 for details.
Replacing the clock/calendar battery
This section describes how to remove and install the clock/calendar battery located on the main
card. This section provides the following procedures:
•
•
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 319
The clock/calendar battery supplies the power required to keep the CMOS information current if
component.
Warning: You must replace the battery with a CR2032, 3v Maxell coin cell battery. Do
not use any other manufacturer because this may invalidate the safety approval of the
BCM main unit and possibly cause a fire or explosion.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Figure 174 Battery replacement overview
Do a software
shutdown
Install
new battery
Set up unit for
maintenance
WARNING:
+ faces up
CAREFULLY
lift battery off
motherboard
Restore unit to
operation
Danger: Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before
opening the computer. Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
To remove the clock/calendar battery
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
4
Disconnect any connectors from the front of the base function tray.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
5
6
Partially remove the base function tray from the main unit. Do not crimp, stretch, or damage
the cables or connectors.
Remove the base function tray bezel. See “To remove the base function tray bezel” on page
237.
7
8
Disconnect the DS30 cables from the MSC. Do not crimp, stretch, or damage the cables or
connectors.
9
Completely remove the base function tray from the main unit. See “Removing the base
304).
11 Use your finger to carefully lift the battery out of the socket. For the location of the battery
Caution: Do not use any type of tool to remove the battery.
Figure 175 Removing the clock/calendar battery
The battery is located
under the edge of the
power supply
Base function tray - front
CMOS
battery
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware 321
To install a new clock/calendar battery
Warning: There is a danger of explosion if you do not replace the battery correctly.
You must replace the battery with a CR2032, 3v Maxell coin cell battery.
The positive side of the battery must face up and the battery must sit securely in the
battery socket.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ensure you have the positive side of the battery facing up when you position it in the socket.
Push down until the battery snaps into the socket.
Partially insert the base function tray into the main unit.
Connect the DS30 connectors to the MSC.
Position the PCI cover plate on the front of the base function tray so that the base function tray
and cover plate screw holes align.
9
Position the PCI cover plate locking screw in the PCI cover plate. Tighten the PCI cover plate
10 Install the base function tray bezel (see “To install the base function tray bezel” on page 238).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 Chapter 24 Replacing data cards and processing hardware
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 323
Chapter 25
Replacing or installing a cooling fan
This chapter describes how to replace a cooling fan in the BCM200 and BCM400 main unit. This
chapter also describes how to add a second fan to the BCM400 main unit (available through the
field redundancy upgrade kit).
This chapter contains the following topics:
•
•
Note: For the BCM400 RFO configuration, a redundant cooling fan and power supply is
included.
Warning: You must remove all of the connections to the BCM main unit before you
power the system down. Failure to disconnect lines before you power down the system
can cause damage to the system.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in static-free container.
Replacing a cooling fan
This section contains procedures to replace the cooling fan in the BCM200 and BCM400 main
unit, and the expansion unit. This section contains the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling fans circulate air through the main unit and expansion unit to prevent the components
from overheating.
Figure 176 provides an overview of the fan replacement process.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan
Figure 176 Cooling fan replacement overview
FAN LED and/or
temp. LED
indicate problem
Install new fan.
Set up unit for
maintenance
Connect fan
cables to power
Disconnect and
remove failed fan
Restore unit to
operation
Check fan LED
Removing a BCM400 cooling fan
Use this procedure to remove the cooling fans in a BCM400 standard or redundant feature option
(RFO) configuration. The BCM400 standard main unit has one fan. The BCM400 RFO has two
fans.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Before you shut down the system, determine if a fan (in the redundant version) has failed. Refer to
To remove a BCM400 cooling fan
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
4
a
Remove the fan access panel screws at the top and bottom of the panel. Place the screws in
a safe location.
b
c
Tip the top of the fan access panel toward you.
Grasp the fan access panel with both hands and lift the away from the main unit. Do not
stretch the fan cables.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 325
Figure 177 Remove the BCM400 fan access panel
Remove fan access
panel screws
1
Remove fan access
panel
2
5
disconnect both fan cables from the I/O card.
Figure 178 Disconnect the fan cable from the I/O card
Disconnect from
redundant fan (fan #2)
Disconnect from
single fan (fan #1)
I/O Card
Main Card
6
Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the fan access panel. The snap rivet has two parts:
a center pin and a collar. Gently separate the plastic rivet pin with your fingernails from the
center of the rivet collar. Remove the rivet pin and collar from the fan access panel. Place the
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan
Figure 179 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM400 fan access panel
Fan exhaust
Remove the rivet pin from
the rivet collar.
1
2
fan access panel
Remove the rivet collar from
the fan access panel hole.
Rivet collar
Rivet pin
7
8
Lift the fan away from the fan access panel and place it in a safe location.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to remove the redundant fan on the BCM400 RFO configuration.
Installing a BCM400 cooling fan
Use this procedure to install a single or redundant cooling fan in a BCM400 main unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a BCM400 cooling fan
1
Place the new fan in the fan access panel in the position from which you removed the old fan.
Ensure the I/O card connector cable is oriented to the bottom of the fan and that the fan label is
closest to the grill on the panel.
Note: Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM main unit. Airflow
is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan.
Note: Redundant feature option (dual fans)
If you are installing a second fan, you must use the new fan access panel (included with
the redundant feature option kit) on the back of the BCM main unit. The redundant fan
access panel has two fan exhausts.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 327
2
Attach the fan to the fan access panel using the four plastic rivets.
a
Align the fan chassis mounting holes with the holes in the fan access panel (see Figure
180).
Figure 180 Fan chassis mounting holes
Chassis mounting
holes
I/O card fan
connector
b
c
Hold the fan in place against the fan access panel. Push the rivet collar through the fan
access panel and fan chassis mounting holes.
Insert the rivet pin into the rivet collar. Repeat this step for the second fan in the BCM400
Figure 181 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM400 fan access panel
Insert the rivet collar into the
fan access panel hole.
Fan exhaust
1
fan access panel
Insert the rivet pin into the
rivet collar.
2
Rivet collar
Rivet pin
3
a
b
Connect Fan #1 (the fan farthest from the power supply) to connector #1 on the I/O card.
Connect Fan #2 (the fan closest to the power supply) to connector #2 on the I/O card.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan
Figure 182 Connect the fan cables to the I/O card
Connect to redundant
fan (fan #2)
Connect to single
fan (fan #1)
I/O Card
Main Card
4
a
b
c
d
Tip the top of the fan access panel toward you.
Insert the bottom lip of the fan access panel in the main unit.
Align the screw holes in the fan access panel with the screw holes on the main unit.
Install and tighten the fan access panel screws.
Figure 183 Install the fan access panel to the main unit
Install fan access panel
1
Install fan access
panel screws
2
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 329
5
6
Restore the BCM system to operation. For details, refer to “Restarting the system after
The BCM system starts up when you connect the AC power cord. The start-up process takes
several minutes to complete.
Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed.
a
b
Hold a piece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust. A correctly installed fan blows
air away from the main unit. If you are testing two fans, cover one fan at a time with your
hand.
cooling fan” on page 324) and reinstall the fan in the correct position (this procedure).
Removing a BCM200 cooling fan
Use this procedure to remove the cooling fan in a BCM200 main unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove a BCM200 cooling fan
1
2
3
Disconnect the BCM system from the AC power outlet.
Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal
surface.
4
5
Remove the top cover from the main unit (see “Installing the main unit top cover” on page
246).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan
Figure 184 Disconnect the BCM200 fan cable from the I/O card
Disconnect from
single fan (fan #1)
I/O Card
Main Card
6
a
Remove the snap rivets that hold the fan to the main unit. The snap rivet has two parts: a
center pin and a collar. Gently separate the plastic rivet pin with your fingernails from the
center of the rivet collar. Remove the rivet pin and the collar from the chassis. Place the
rivet pin and collar in a safe location.
b
c
Pull the fan away from the main unit (from the interior).
Place the fan in a safe location.
Figure 185 Remove the snap rivets from the BCM200 main unit
Fan exhaust
Remove the rivet pin from
the rivet collar.
1
2
Main unit
Remove the rivet collar from
the fan access panel hole.
Rivet collar
Rivet pin
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 331
Installing the BCM200 cooling fan
Use this procedure to install a cooling fan in a BCM200 main unit.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To install a BCM200 cooling fan
1
Place the new fan in proper location in the BCM200 main unit. Ensure the I/O card connector
cable is on the bottom.
Note: Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM main unit. Airflow
is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan.
2
3
Align the fan chassis mounting holes with the holes on the main unit.
Attach the fan to the main unit using four snap rivets:
a
Hold the fan in place and push the rivet collar through the fan access panel and fan chassis
mounting holes.
b
Figure 186 Insert the snap rivets into the BCM200 main unit
Fan exhaust
Insert the rivet collar into the
fan access panel hole.
1
2
Main unit
Insert the rivet pin into the
rivet collar.
Rivet collar
Rivet pin
4
Connect the power supply cable to the I/O card. Connect the fan to connector #1 on the I/O
card.
5
6
Restore the BCM system to operation. For details, refer to “Restarting the system after
The BCM system starts up when you connect the AC power cord. The start-up process takes
several minutes to complete.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan
7
Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed.
a
Hold a piece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust. A correctly installed fan blows
air away from the main unit.
b
cooling fan” on page 329) and reinstall the fan in the correct orientation (this procedure).
Removing an expansion unit fan
The BCM expansion unit comes either with one fan or a redundant fan set. The single-fan unit is
not upgradeable.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
To remove an expansion unit fan
1
2
Disconnect the fan power cable from the hub card.
Note: If the unit has redundant fans, each fan has a connector on the hub board.
3
Locate the screws that fasten the fan casing to the expansion unit back wall and remove them.
4
5
Remove the four screws (or snap rivets) that hold the fan to the expansion unit.
Lift the failed fan out of the expansion unit.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan 333
Figure 187 Fan screws location in expansion unit, 2.0 models.
Fan connector on
hub board
Screws attached to fan
Figure 188 Fan screws location in expansion unit, 2.5 redundancy models.
Fan connectors
on hub board
Load resistor
module
Screws attached to fan
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 Chapter 25 Replacing or installing a cooling fan
Installing an expansion unit fan
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge.
Always wear a grounded wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the
components in a static-free container.
Note: Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back wall of the BCM expansion unit
chassis. Airflow is out of the chassis as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan.
To install an expansion unit fan
1
2
3
4
5
Place the fan in the expansion unit so that the label faces the back wall of the unit.
Align the screw holes in the fan with the screw holes in the expansion unit and attach the fan.
Connect the fan power supply cable to the hub board.
Replace the cover.
Restore the BCM system to operation. For details, refer to “Restarting the system after
The BCM system starts up when you connect the AC power cord. The start-up process takes
several minutes to complete.
6
Test the direction of the fan exhaust air flow to determine if the fan is correctly installed.
a
Hold a piece of paper or your hand close to the fan exhaust. A correctly installed fan blows
air away from the main unit.
b
cooling fan” on page 329) and reinstall the fan in the correct orientation (this procedure).
Troubleshooting cooling fans
There are three LEDs on the front of the BCM base function tray and one on the front of the
and temperature LEDs.
Table 84 Fan and temperature LEDs on the base function tray
LED Label Description
Green LED On
Red LED On (Only)
Temperature
Temperature is below
threshold.
Temperature is in alarm status.
Possible fans failure.
Fans
All installed fans are working.
All components are working.
There is a problem with a minimum of
one fan.
Power
Component failure.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A DTM wiring chart 335
Appendix A
DTM wiring chart
The digital telephone line is connected to the digital trunk module (DTM) through the RJ-48C jack
Figure 189 DTM RJ-48C port
DTM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RJ-48C pin-out
Bantam jack
RJ-48C jack
Table 85 lists the wiring details for the RJ-48C port.
Table 85 DTM RJ-48C port wiring
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Receive Shield
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
Transmit Shield
No connection
No connection
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 Appendix A DTM wiring chart
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B BRIM wiring chart 337
Appendix B
BRIM wiring chart
The digital BRI ISDN lines are connected to the BRIM through the RJ-45 jacks on the front of the
BRIM.
to connect S-Loop devices, such as video phones, terminal adapters, and group 3 fax machines.
The T-Loop connections are used to connect to the CO/PSTN.
Warning: For a U-Loop connection, the BRIM must be connected only to an NT1
provided by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network
Voltage (TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Figure 190 BRIM RJ-45 ports
BRIM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RJ-45 pin-out
RJ-45 jacks
Table 86 lists the wiring details for the RJ-45 ports.
Table 86 BRIM RJ-45 port wiring
Pin
Signal
Signal on system side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
No connection
No connection
+ Receive (+Rx)
+ Transmit (+Tx)
- Transmit (-Tx)
- Receive (-Rx)
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
+Tx
+Rx
-Rx
-Tx
No connection
No connection
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 Appendix B BRIM wiring chart
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C GATM wiring chart 339
Appendix C
GATM wiring chart
Analog telephone lines are connected to the GATM4 or GATM8 through the RJ-21 connector on
Figure 191 GATM RJ-21 connector
GATM
RJ-21 connector
RJ-21 pin-out
Table 87 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the GATM4.
Table 87 GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line
Pin
Connection
Wire color
1
26
1
Tip
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Ring
2
—
—
3
27
2
Tip
Ring
28
3
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
Tip
29
4
30
5
Ring
4
31
6
Tip
Ring
Blue-Red
—
32
7
No connection
No connection
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
—
49
24
No connection
No connection
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 Appendix C GATM wiring chart
Table 87 GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Line
Pin
Connection
Wire color
Aux
50
25
Tip
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
Ring
Note: The Aux port supports full data speeds. When the line
is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone to
indicate it is in use. If you try to seize the line using the
phone, the display shows “in use.” Also, in the event of a
power failure, an analog set on line 1 goes active (powered
by the CO).
Table 88 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the GATM8.
Table 88 GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line
Pin
Connection
Wire color
1
26
1
Tip
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Ring
2
—
—
3
27
2
Tip
Ring
28
3
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
Tip
29
4
30
5
Ring
4
31
6
Tip
Ring
Blue-Red
—
—
5
32
7
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
Tip
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
33
8
34
9
Ring
6
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
Tip
Ring
Slate-Red
—
—
7
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
Tip
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Ring
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C GATM wiring chart 341
Table 88 GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Line
Pin
Connection
Wire color
8
39
14
40
15
Tip
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Ring
—
No connection
No connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
—
49
24
50
25
No connection
No connection
Tip
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
Aux
(see
Note)
Ring
Note: The Aux port supports full data speeds. When the line
is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone to
indicate it is in use. If you try to seize the line using the
phone, the display shows “in use.” Also, in the event of a
power failure, an analog set on line 1 goes active (powered
by the CO).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 Appendix C GATM wiring chart
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts 343
Appendix D
4x16 wiring charts
You can connect up to 4 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the 4x16 media
bay module (MBM).
The analog telephones lines are connected to the 4x16 MBM through the RJ-11 jacks (labeled 1 to
auxiliary jack on the front of the MBM.
The digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, are connected to the RJ-21
connector on the front of the 4x16 MBM.
Figure 192 4x16 MBM connectors
4x16
RJ-21 connector
RJ-21 pin-out
RJ-11 jacks
6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ-11 pin-out
Table 89 lists the wiring details for the RJ-11 jacks on the 4x16 MBM. This wiring applies to the
numbered ports and the auxiliary ports.
Table 89 4x16 RJ-11 port wiring
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
No connection
No connection
Ring
Tip
No connection
No connection
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts
Table 90 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the 4x16 MBM.
Table 90 4x16 MBM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set
Pin
Connection
Wire color
1
26
1
Tip
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Ring
Tip
2
3
27
2
Ring
Tip
28
3
Ring
Tip
4
29
4
Ring
Tip
5
30
5
Ring
Tip
6
31
6
Ring
Tip
Blue-Red
7
32
7
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Ring
Tip
8
33
8
Ring
Tip
9
34
9
Ring
Tip
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
—
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
Ring
Tip
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Ring
Tip
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
No connection
No connection
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts 345
Table 90 4x16 MBM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Set
Pin
Connection
Wire color
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
—
50
25
No connection
No connection
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 Appendix D 4x16 wiring charts
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 347
Appendix E
DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts
Digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, are connected to a digital station
module (DSM16 or DSM32) through the RJ-21 connectors on the front of the media bay modules
(MBM). The DSM16 has a single RJ-21 connector and the DSM32 has two RJ-21 connectors (see
Figure 193 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connectors
DSM16
DSM32
RJ-21 connector
RJ-21 connectors
RJ-21 pin-out
Table 91 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connectors on the DSM16 and DSM32.
Table 91 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set
Pin
Connection
Wire color
White-Blue
1
26
1
Tip
Ring
Tip
Blue-White
2
3
4
5
27
2
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Ring
Tip
28
3
Ring
Tip
29
4
Ring
Tip
30
5
Ring
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 Appendix E DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts
Table 91 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Set
Pin
Connection
Wire color
6
31
6
Tip
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Ring
Tip
7
32
7
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Ring
Tip
8
33
8
Ring
Tip
9
34
9
Ring
Tip
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
—
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
Ring
Tip
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Ring
Tip
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
No connection
No connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
—
50
25
No connection
No connection
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM8 wiring chart 349
Appendix F
ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM8 wiring chart
Analog telephony devices, such as single-line telephones, modems, and fax machines, are
connected to the analog station module (ASM) through the RJ-21 connector on the front of the
Figure 194 ASM RJ-21 connector
GASM8
RJ-21 pin-out
RJ-21 connector
Table 92 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector on the ASM.
Table 92 ASM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set
Pin
Connection
Wire color
1
26
1
Tip
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Ring
2
3
27
2
Tip
Ring
28
3
Tip
Ring
4
29
4
Tip
Ring
5
30
5
Tip
Ring
6
31
6
Tip
Ring
Blue-Red
7
32
7
Tip
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Ring
8
33
8
Tip
Ring
—
34
9
No connection
No connection
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 Appendix F ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM8 wiring chart
Table 92 ASM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Set
Pin
Connection
Wire color
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
—
50
25
No connection
No connection
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
351
Appendix G
Market profile attributes
This section describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes. These attributes are
based on the market profile that you select when you configure the system. Each market profile is
designed using a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical
area in which the system is deployed.
This section covers the following main topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media bay module availability
Some of the media bay modules (MBM) are customized for a specific region and are not available
market profile.
The symbols in the chart are defined as follows:
ꢀ
indicates full support. The MBM is available and is localized in the market profile.
ꢁ
indicates that functionality and support is limited. The MBM is available in the market
profile, but is not localized.
Table 93 Media bay module availability by market profile (Sheet 1 of 2)
DSM16(+)/
DSM32 (+) ASM8 ASM8+ GASM8
ASM/
CTM4/
CTM8
GATM4/
GATM8
Market profile
Australia
Brazil
4x16
BRI
DTM
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
CALA
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
Canada
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Caribbean
Denmark
France
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 93 Media bay module availability by market profile (Sheet 2 of 2)
DSM16(+)/
DSM32 (+) ASM8 ASM8+ GASM8
ASM/
CTM4/
CTM8
GATM4/
GATM8
Market profile
Germany
Global
4x16
BRI
DTM
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ
Holland
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
Hong Kong
Italy
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ
ꢀ
Mexico
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢀ
New Zealand
North America
Norway
ꢁ ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
Poland
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ
PRC
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ
Spain
ꢀ
Sweden
ꢀ
Switzerland
Taiwan
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢀ
ꢀ
United Kingdom
ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢀ
FEM MBM–Norstar trunk cartridge combinations
Norstar trunk cartridges can be connected to the BCM system using the fiber expansion module
(FEM). The following table provides a cross-reference between market profiles and the Norstar
trunk cartridges you can connect to the FEM.
Table 94 Norstar trunk cartridge availability, by market profile (Sheet 1 of 2)
Analog Country-specific
Market profile
Australia
Brazil
BRI S/T 2/4
BRI U2/4
Analog DID
Analog E&M
CLID
analog trunk card
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CALA
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
Canada
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
Caribbean
Denmark
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 353
Table 94 Norstar trunk cartridge availability, by market profile (Sheet 2 of 2)
Analog Country-specific
Market profile
France
BRI S/T 2/4
BRI U2/4
Analog DID
Analog E&M
CLID
analog trunk card
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Germany
Global
ꢀ ꢀ
Holland
ꢀ
Hong Kong
Italy
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
Mexico
ꢀ ꢀ
New Zealand
North America
Norway
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Poland
PRC
ꢀ ꢀ
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ
United Kingdom
ꢀ
Time zones and language information
This section provides information about time and date format and language support for Central
America and South America.
Time and date format based on language
Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the BCM system is located. You can choose a
compatible time zone from the Time Zone list in Element Manager. If your exact location is not on
the list, choose the location with the time zone closest to you. Note that some time zones are
individualized because they do not switch from Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time (for
example, Saskatchewan).
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 Appendix G Market profile attributes
The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the market profile.
Table 95 provides a list of formats based on language or country.
Table 95 Time/date formats based on language
Language/country
Time/date format
Danish
2001-01-01 13:57
1 Jan 01 13:57
1 jan 13:57
Dutch
EuroFrench
EuroSpanish
Brazil
1 Ene 13:57
German
1 Jan 13:57
Italian
1 Gen 13:57
NA English
NA French
NA Spanish
Norwegian
Swedish
Jan 1 1:57 pm
2001-01-01 13:57
Ene 1 1:57 pm
1 Jan 13:57
2001-01-01 13:57
1 Ock 13:57
Turkish
UK English
1 Jan 1:57 pm
Language support for South America and Central America
Table 96 shows the language support for South American and Central American countries.
Table 96 South/Central America language support
Language
English
Country
•
•
•
•
•
•
Anguilla
Antigua
Aruba
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bermuda
•
•
•
•
•
•
Montserrat
St. Kitts
•
•
Suriname
Cayman Islands
Curacao
Turks and
Caicos
St. Lucia
•
•
Trinidad
USVI
Bahamas
Barbados
Belize
Dominica
Grenada
St. Maarten
St. Thomas
St. Vincent
Guyana
French
•
Haiti
•
•
•
•
•
Argentina
Bolivia
•
•
•
•
•
Dominican Republic
El Salvador
Ecuador
•
•
•
•
•
Jamaica
Mexico
•
•
•
•
Puerto Rico
Peru
Spanish
Chile
Nicaragua
Panama
Paraguay
Uruguay
Venezuela
Columbia
Costa Rica
Guatemala
Honduras
Portuguese • Brazil
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 355
Caller ID display formats
The Caller ID function is supported on telephones that provide a display window. Caller ID
formats consist of the name and number of the calling party. For further information on compatible
The North America market profile supports the following format: 5554775 (613).
All other market profiles display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14
characters: 6135554775.
Core parameters for market profiles
The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables (market
profiles are listed in alphabetical order):
•
•
•
•
Table 97 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality
Attribute
Australia
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean Denmark
Access codes
Direct dial digit
9
0
9
0
0
9
0
9
0
9
0
9
Dest code for
default route
Digital trunking ISDN
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
NI-2
ISDN
NI-2
NI-2
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
protocols
DASS2
DPNSS
BRI trunk
protocol
variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG
Protocols
BRI S-loop
protocol variant
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
NI-2
NI-2
ETSI-102
PRI trunk
protocol
variants
NI-2
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG DMS100
MCDN
DMS100
DMS250
4ESS
MCDN
MCDN
DMS250
4ESS
MCDN
MCDN
Global analog
trunk versions
GATM
GATM
GATM
GATM
GATM
N/A
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 97 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality
Attribute
Australia
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean Denmark
Conference
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
tone supported
Held line
reminder
After 30
seconds
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Delay ring
transfer
After 15
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
Telephony
feature settings callback timeout rings
Transfer
After 15
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
Network
callback
30
30
30
N/A
30
30
Host delay (ms) 1000
Link time (ms)
1000
300
1000
600
1000
600
1000
600
1000
600
Target line if
busy setting
Busy
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Prime
Companding
law
A-law
A-law
A-law
mu-law
mu-law
A-law
DTI carrier type E1
E1
1
E1
1
T1
1
T1
1
E1
1
System settings
Hunt groups
Number of rings
in a cycle
2
M7000 set
supported
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Default delay
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
Queue timeout 60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
If busy
Mode
Night
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast
Start 17:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00
End 08:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00
Service times
Evening
Lunch
Start 00:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00
End 00:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00
Start 00:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00
End 00:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 357
Table 97 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality
Attribute
Australia
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean Denmark
Ringing service Off
mode
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Ringing service Yes
trunk ans
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Restriction
Off
service mode
Restriction
000
190
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
global overrides
131440
Restriction filter 0(013),
0,
0,
0,
0,
N/A
01
1(13, 1800) 1(1800,
1877,
1(1800,
1877,
1(1800,
1877,
1(1800,
1877,
Service modes
1888),
911(911),
1888),
911(911),
1888),
911(911),
1888),
911(911),
9411, 976, 9411, 976, 9411, 976, 9411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
1***900,
5551212
1***900,
5551212
1***900,
5551212
Restriction filter 00, 1(13,
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
05
11, 1800)
Restriction filter
06
*
Routing service Off
mode
Routing service No
overflow
No
No
No
No
No
Public DN
Public DN
lengths
Default(7)
Default(7), Default(7), Default(7), Default(7), Default(8),
0(11),
0(11),
0(11),
0(11),
00(17),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
1(3), 16(5),
17(4), 18(4)
Unknown
number length
N/A
8
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
N/A
N/A
Variable
Variable
Variable
Public OLI
Local number
length
7
7
National
9
10
10
number length
Handsfree
Auto
1
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Pickup group
Allow redirect
None
None
None
None
None
Set capabilities
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Call forward
delay
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 97 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality
Attribute
Australia
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean Denmark
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward
delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone
detection
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Set preferences Language
UK English Portuguese Spanish
English
French
Spanish
English
French
Spanish
Danish
English
Norwegian
Swedish
(first is default) VICAP
English
English
French
Spanish
Analog VSC
(tone)
1831
1831
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
ONN blocking
Analog VSC
(pulse)
None
BRI VSC
None
None
None
None
None
None
BRI per loop
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
None
SuprsBit
None
SuprsBit
None
SuprsBit
Simple
Release reason Release text
Release code
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Tone duration
80 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
DTMF
parameters
Pause time
Interdigit time
Table 98 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
Hong
Functionality
Attribute
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Kong
Italy
Access codes
Direct dial digit
9
0
9
0
0
9
0
9
0
9
9
0
Dest code for
default route
Digital trunking ISDN
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
protocols
DASS2
DPNSS
BRI trunk
protocol
variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
HKTA2015 ETSI-102
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG
Protocols
BRI S-loop
protocol variant
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-102
PRI trunk
protocol
variants
HkTA2015 ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG MCDN
MCDN
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
MCDN
MCDN
MCDN
Global analog
trunk versions
N/A
N/A
GATM
N/A
GATM
N/A
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 359
Table 98 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
Hong
Kong
Functionality
Attribute
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Italy
Conference
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
tone supported
Held line
reminder
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Delay ring
transfer
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
Telephony
feature settings callback timeout rings
Transfer
After 4
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
Network
callback
30
30
30
30
N/A
30
Host delay (ms) 1000
1000
N/A
1000
600
1000
600
1000
600
1000
N/A
Link time (ms)
N/A
Target line if
busy setting
PBX >
Busy
PBX > Busy Prime
Prime
Prime
PBX >
Busy
DID >
Prime
DID >
Prime
DID >
Prime
Companding
law
A-law
A-law
A-law
A-law
mu-law
A-law
DTI carrier type E1
E1
2
E1
1
E1
1
T1
1
E1
2
System settings
Hunt groups
Number of rings
in a cycle
2
M7000 set
supported
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Default delay
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
Queue timeout 60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
If busy
Mode
Night
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential
Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00
End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00
Service times
Evening
Lunch
Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00
End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00
Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00
End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 98 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Hong
Functionality
Attribute
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Kong
Italy
Ringing service Manual
mode
Manual
Off
Off
Off
Manual
Ringing service Yes
trunk ans
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
Restriction
Off
service mode
Restriction
global overrides
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Restriction filter N/A
01
0,
00***, 170, N/A
172, 173,
1(1800,
1877,
1888),
911(911),
9411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1747, 1760,
1761, 1766,
1770, 1771,
1772, 1775,
1778, 1783,
1788, 900
Service modes
1***900,
5551212
Restriction filter N/A
05
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
Restriction filter N/A
06
Routing service Off
mode
Routing service No
overflow
No
No
No
No
No
Public DN
Public DN
lengths
Default(25) Default(25) Default(7), Default(7)
Default(7), Default(25)
0(11),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Unknown
number length
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Public OLI
Local number
length
National
number length
Handsfree
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Pickup group
Allow redirect
None
None
None
None
None
None
Set capabilities
N0060612
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Call forward
delay
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 361
Table 98 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Italy parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Hong
Kong
Functionality
Attribute
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Italy
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward
delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone
detection
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Set preferences Language
EuroFrench German
English
French
Spanish
Turkish
Dutch
English
EuroFrench Spanish
English
French
Italian
English
(first is default) English
English
Analog VSC
(tone)
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
ONN blocking
Analog VSC
(pulse)
None
BRI VSC
None
None
None
None
None
None
BRI per loop
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Detailed
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
None
SuprsBit
Simple
Release reason Release text
Release code
On
Off
On
On
Off
On
Tone duration
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
DTMF
parameters
Pause time
Interdigit time
Table 99 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
New
North
Functionality
Attribute
Mexico
Zealand
America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Access codes
Direct dial digit
0
9
0
9
0
9
9
0
0
9
0
9
Dest code for
default route
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 99 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
New
North
Functionality
Attribute
Mexico
Zealand
America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Digital trunking ISDN
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
NI-2
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
protocols
DASS2
DPNSS
BRI trunk
protocol
variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG
Protocols
BRI S-loop
protocol variant
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG DMS100
MCDN
ETSI-102
+ BTNR191
NI-2
NI-2
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
PRI trunk
protocol
variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
MCDN
DMS250
4ESS
MCDN
MCDN
MCDN
Global analog
trunk versions
GATM
No
N/A
Yes
GATM
N/A
No
GATM
Yes
GATM
No
Conference
No
tone supported
Held line
reminder
Off
Immediate Off
Off
After 30
seconds
Off
Delay ring
transfer
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 15
rings
After 4
rings
Telephony
feature settings callback timeout rings
Transfer
After 4
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 4
rings
After 15
rings
After 4
rings
Network
callback
30
30
N/A
30
30
30
Host delay (ms) 1000
1000
N/A
1000
600
1000
N/A
1000
1000
600
Link time (ms)
600
Target line if
busy setting
Prime
PBX > Busy Prime
PBX > Busy Busy
Prime
DID >
Prime
DID >
Prime
Companding
law
A-law
A-law
mu-law
A-law
A-law
A-law
DTI carrier type E1
E1
2
T1
1
E1
2
E1
2
E1
1
System settings
Hunt groups
Number of rings
in a cycle
1
M7000 set
supported
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default delay
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
4 ring
cycles
Queue timeout 60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
60 sec
If busy
Mode
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Busy tone
Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Sequential Broadcast
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 363
Table 99 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
New
North
Functionality
Attribute
Mexico
Zealand
America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Night
Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00 Start 23:00
End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 07:00 End 08:00 End 07:00
Service times
Evening
Lunch
Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 17:00 Start 00:00 Start 17:00
End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 23:00 End 00:00 End 23:00
Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 12:00 Start 00:00 Start 12:00
End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 13:00 End 00:00 End 13:00
Ringing service Off
mode
Manual
Off
Manual
Off
Yes
Off
Off
Ringing service Yes
trunk ans
Yes
Yes
Off
Yes
Yes
Off
Restriction
Off
Off
Off
service mode
Restriction
global overrides
N/A
999
112
N/A
N/A
112
990
N/A
Restriction filter 0,
01 1(1800,
0(0800), 1 0,
1(1800,
N/A
N/A
0, 1(1800,
1877,
1888),
1877,
1877,
Service modes
1888),
1888),
911(911),
9411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
911(911),
9411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
911(911),
9411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
Restriction filter N/A
05
010, 1, 00
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
Restriction filter N/A
06
*
Routing service Off
mode
Off
No
Routing service No
overflow
No
No
No
No
Public DN
Public DN
lengths
Default(7), Default(8), Default(7), Default(25) Default(7)
Default(7),
0(11),
0(11),
0(11)
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
00(17),
1(3), 9(3)
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 99 Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, Poland, and PRC parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
New
North
Functionality
Attribute
Mexico
Zealand
America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Unknown
number length
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
N/A
Variable
Variable
Variable
Public OLI
Local number
length
Variable
Variable
7
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
National
10
number length
Handsfree
Auto
None
Auto
Auto
Auto
0
Auto
Pickup group
Allow redirect
None
None
None
None
None
Set capabilities
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Call forward
delay
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Disabled
(4)
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward
delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone
detection
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Set preferences Language
English
UKEnglish English
Norwegian Polish
English
(first is default) French
Spanish
VICAP
French
Spanish
English
Swedish
Danish
EuroFrench French
English
Czech
Spanish
Turkish
Turkish
Analog VSC
(tone)
None
141
141
None
None
None
1831
None
ONN blocking
Analog VSC
(pulse)
None
None
1831
None
BRI VSC
None
141
None
None
None
None
BRI per loop
SuprsBit
Simple
SrvcCode
Detailed
SuprsBit
None
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
Release reason Release text
Release code
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Tone duration
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
110 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
DTMF
parameters
Pause time
Interdigit time
Table 100 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
United
Functionality
Attribute
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Kingdom
Access codes
Direct dial digit
9
0
9
0
9
0
0
9
0
9
Dest code for
default route
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 365
Table 100 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
United
Functionality
Attribute
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Kingdom
Digital trunking ISDN
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
protocols
DASS2
DPNSS
BRI trunk
protocol
variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ITU-T
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
Protocols
BRI S-loop
protocol variant
ETSI-102
ETSI-102
ETSI-102
ETSI-102
ETSI-102
+ BTNR191
PRI trunk
protocol
variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
ITU-T
MCDN
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
Global analog
trunk versions
N/A
N/A
N/A
GATM
No
GATM
Conference
No
No
No
Yes
tone supported
Held line
reminder
Off
Off
Off
Off
Immediate
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
30
Delay ring
transfer
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
30
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
30
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
30
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
N/A
Telephony
Transfer
feature settings callback timeout
Network
callback
Host delay (ms) 1000
1000
600
1000
N/A
1000
600
1000
N/A
Link time (ms)
N/A
Target line if
busy setting
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Prime
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Prime
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Companding
law
A-law
A-law
A-law
mu-law
A-law
DTI carrier type E1
E1
1
E1
2
T1
1
E1
2
System settings
Hunt groups
Number of rings
in a cycle
2
M7000 set
supported
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default delay
4 ring cycles
4 ring cycles
60 sec
4 ring cycles
60 sec
4 ring cycles
60 sec
4 ring cycles
60 sec
Queue timeout 60 sec
If busy
Mode
Busy tone
Sequential
Busy tone
Broadcast
Busy tone
Sequential
Busy tone
Broadcast
Busy tone
Sequential
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 100 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
United
Functionality
Attribute
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Kingdom
Night
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Service times
Evening
Lunch
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Ringing service Manual
mode
Off
Manual
Off
Manual
Ringing service Yes
trunk ans
Yes
Off
Yes
Yes
Off
Yes
Restriction
Off
Off
Off
service mode
Restriction
global overrides
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
999
112
Restriction filter N/A
01
N/A
0, 1(1800,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
0(0800), 1
Service modes
9411, 976,
1976, 1***976,
1900, 1***900,
5551212
Restriction filter N/A
05
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
N/A
010, 1, 00
Restriction filter N/A
06
N/A
N/A
*
Routing service Off
mode
Off
Off
Off
Routing service No
overflow
No
No
No
No
Public DN
Public DN
lengths
Default(25)
Default(11),
00(17),
Default(25)
Default(7),
0(11), 00(12), 0(11) 00(17),
Default(8),
01(10),
02(10),
020(9),
0200(10),
02000(7),
020000(10),
0201(10),
02010(9),
07(10),
01(17),
1(3), 9(3)
011(18),
1(11), 411(3),
911(3)
071(11),
0718(10),
072(11),
077(11),
09(11), 1(3)
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 367
Table 100 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
United
Functionality
Attribute
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Kingdom
Unknown
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
number length
Public OLI
Local number
length
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
National
number length
Handsfree
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
None
Pickup group
Allow redirect
None
None
None
None
None
Set capabilities
Disabled
Disabled (4)
Disabled
Disabled (4)
Disabled
Disabled (4)
Disabled
Disabled (4)
Disabled
Disabled (4)
Call forward
delay
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward
delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone
detection
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Set preferences Language
Euro
Swedish
English
Norwegian
Danish
German
English
EuroFrench
Italian
English
French
Spanish
UKEnglish
VICAP
(first is default) Spanish
English
Portuguese
Analog VSC
(tone)
None
None
None
None
None
141
141
ONN blocking
Analog VSC
(pulse)
None
None
None
BRI VSC
None
None
None
None
141
BRI per loop
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
SuprsBit
Simple
SrvcCode
Detailed
Release reason Release text
Release code
On
On
On
On
Off
Tone duration
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
120 msec
1.5 msec
80 msec
120 msec
3.5 msec
100 msec
DTMF
parameters
Pause time
Interdigit time
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Global analog trunk parameters
This section contains information for the GATM4 and GATM8 MBMs. The information in the
tables applies to downloaded profiles only; it is not applicable to DIP switch modes.
Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles: Denmark, France,
Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland.
For PRC and Hong Kong, analog trunks are available in North American DIP switch mode only.
The global analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables:
•
•
•
•
Table 101 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pulse Dialing (ms)
Break
time
Make
time
Interdigit
time
Market profile
Localized
PSTN standards
Australia
Yes
[1] AS/ACIF S003:2005 (2nd
Edition) — Customer Access
Equipment for Connection to a
Telecommunications Network
85
15
860
[2] AS/ACIF S002:2001 —
Analogue interworking and
non-interference requirements for
Customer Equipment for
connection to the Public Switched
Telephone Network
Brazil
CALA
Yes
[1] Identification of the Calling Party 66
for SPC With DTMF, 220-250-713.
34
40
800
700
[2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct
Access Arrangement Specification.
No
N/A
60
(North American
based A-law)
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
60
60
60
40
40
40
700
700
700
No (North American N/A
based A-Law)
Mexico
Yes
[1] Mexico general Specification,
June 9, 1993
60
66
40
34
700
740
New Zealand
No (UK-based
telephony with
Australian tones)
N/A
North America
N0060612
Yes
N/A
60
40
700
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 369
Table 101 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Pulse Dialing (ms)
Break
time
Make
time
Interdigit
time
Market profile
Localized
PSTN standards
Poland
Yes
[1] Polish ASS_1_v1.doc
66
33
700
[2] ITU-T Telecommunication
Standardization Sector of ITU
Supplement2 Series E 01/94
Taiwan
Yes
Yes
[1] Technical Specifications for
Terminal Equipment for Connection
to Public Switched Telephone
Network, PSTN01, September 27,
2001
66
66
33
34
800
740
United Kingdom
N/A
Table 102 Transmission parameters
Transmission
Loop length
adjustment
capability
Tx CO gain
(short, medium, (short, medium,
long)
Rx CO gain
PCM coding
scheme
Market profile
AC impedance
long)
Australia
A-law
220 + (820 ||
120nF)
No
(N/A, 0, N/A)
(N/A, 6 dB, N/A)
Brazil
A-law
A-law
mu-law
mu-law
A-law
A-law
A-law
600 /900
600
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
CALA
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
Canada
Caribbean
Global
600
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
600
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
600
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
Mexico
600
No
New Zealand
320 + (1050 || No
230nF)
North America
Poland
mu-law
A-law
u-law
600
600
600
Yes
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
No
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
Taiwan
Yes
United Kingdom
A-law
320 + (1050 || No
230nF
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 103 Call supervision parameters
Call supervision
Ring
Link/flash time
(ms)
Force on-hook Wetting time
confirmation
count (ms)
Market profile
OSI time (ms)
time (ms)
(ms)
Australia
Brazil
600
300
600
600
600
600
600
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
500
100
100
1600
2000
1500
1600
1600
1500
1600
1600
1600
1800
1600
1600
0
150
256
256
256
256
256
256
200
256
256
256
200
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
15
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
600
500
600
90
N/A
N/A
0
Taiwan
United Kingdom
15
Table 104 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
On-hook caller ID
Disconnect supervision
Message waiting
DTMF
Market
profile
(Start Digit,
Stop Digit) OSI
Line
reversal
Voltage
reversal dial tone
Stutter
FSK
Busy tone
FSK
Australia
Bellcore
Not
supported
No
No
ROI and
ROA
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
Brazil
Not
Not
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
supported supported
CALA
Bellcore
Bellcore
Bellcore
Bellcore
ETSI
Not
supported
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Not
supported
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
Not
supported
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
Not
supported
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
Mexico
Not
supported
Supported
(425 Hz, 250
ms On/ 250
ms Off)
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
New Zealand ETSI
Not
supported
Yes
No
No
Supported Not
Not
(500msUK
Guarded
Clear)
supported supported
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 371
Table 104 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
On-hook caller ID
Disconnect supervision
Message waiting
DTMF
Market
profile
(Start Digit,
Stop Digit) OSI
Line
Voltage
reversal dial tone
Stutter
FSK
Busy tone
reversal
No
FSK
North
Bellcore
Not
Yes
No
Supported Not
Not
America
supported
supported supported
Poland
ETSI
Not
supported
No
Supported in Supported Supported Not
unsupervised in supported supported
Not
mode
supervised
(425 Hz, 500 mode
ms On/ 500
ms Off)
Taiwan
ETSI
ETSI
Supported
(D, C)
No
Supported
(480 + 620
Hz, 500 ms
On/ 500 ms
Off)
No
Supported Not
Not
supported supported
United
Not
Yes
No
No
Supported Not
Not
Kingdom
supported
(500msUK
Guarded
Clear)
supported supported
GASM8 parameters
This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM.
Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles: Brazil, CALA,
Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and
Taiwan.
The GASM8 parameters are provided in the following tables:
•
•
•
Table 105 Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Transmission
DIP
Input
Bi-
PCM
Market
profile
switch
source
Reference Load
directional coding
Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain
scheme
Australia
Yes
Australia TS 003
TCE2
300 + (820
120 nF)
1.3 dB
CCITT
A-law
Canada
Yes
Yes
North
Refer to North
600
600
3 dB
3 dB
CCITT
mu-law
America America spec
Caribbean
North
Refer to North
CCITT
mu-law
America America spec
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 105 Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Transmission
DIP
Input
Bi-
PCM
Market
profile
switch
source
Reference Load
directional coding
Localized setting Specifications impedance impedance impedance gain
scheme
Global
No (North North
American America
based
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
600
3 dB
CCITT
A-law
A-law)
Hong Kong
Mexico
No (North North
American America
based
600
600
3 dB
CCITT
mu-law
mu-law)
No (North North
American America
based
3 dB
CCITT
A-law
A-law)
New Zealand No
(UK-base
UK
300 + (1000 || 220 nF)
1.8 dB
CCITT
A-law
d
telephony
with
Australian
tones)
North
America
Yes
North
America
EIA/TIA-464A
T512.1
600
600
3 dB
CCITT
mu-law
T512.2
Poland
Yes
Poland [1] Polish
ASS_1_v1.doc
0dB for Rx CCITT
A-law
-7dB for Tx
[2] Technical
Requirements
for Private
Automatic
Branch
Exchanges.
Reference
Analog
interfaces11.d
oc
United
Kingdom
Yes
UK
BS 6450 Part 4
BTNR 1080
300 + (1000 || 220 nF)
1.8 dB
CCITT
A-law
EN 41003
Annex D
BS 6305
BTNR 315
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 373
Table 106 Loop interface and call supervision parameters
Loop interface
Call supervision
Min
Min. seize answer
Min/max
recall
duration
Loop current Ringing
limit
Ringing
Min clear
duration
Market profile
frequency amplitude duration
duration
Australia
Canada
32 mA
32 mA
25 Hz
20 Hz
65 Vrms 200 ms
65 Vrms 200 ms
50 ms
25 ms
30/150 ms 1500 ms
250/1100
ms
1400 ms
1400 ms
1400 ms
1400 ms
1400 ms
Caribbean
Global
32 mA
32 mA
32 mA
32 mA
20 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
65 Vrms 200 ms
65 Vrms 200 ms
65 Vrms 200 ms
65 Vrms 200 ms
25 ms
25 ms
25 ms
25 ms
250/1100
ms
250/1100
ms
Hong Kong
Mexico
250/1100
ms
250/1100
ms
New Zealand
North America
32 mA
32 mA
25 Hz
20 Hz
65 Vrms 200 ms
65 Vrms 200 ms
50 ms
25 ms
25/150 ms 1500 ms
250/1100
ms
1400 ms
Poland
32 mA
32 mA
25 Hz
25 Hz
65 Vrms 180 ms
65 Vrms 200 ms
80 ms
50 ms
51/88 ms
550 ms
United Kingdom
25/150 ms 1500 ms
Table 107 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters
Dial pulse
DTMF
Dial pulse
coding
Min/max
break
Min/max
make
Min interdigit
pause
DTMF coding Min DTMF
Market profile
scheme
duration
duration
duration
scheme
detect level
Australia
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
25/120 ms
25/120 ms
25/120 ms
25/120 ms
25/120 ms
25/120 ms
15/200 ms
25/120 ms
51/88 ms
10/90 ms
250 ms
250 ms
250 ms
250 ms
250 ms
250 ms
200 ms
250 ms
150 ms
200 ms
16 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
12 digits
16 digits
12 digits
12 digits
16 digits
-25 dB
-25 dB
-25 dB
-25 dB
-25 dB
-25 dB
-25 dB
-25 dB
-29 dB
-25 dB
Canada
10/90 ms
10/90 ms
10/90 ms
10/90 ms
10/90 ms
15/200 ms
10/90 ms
25/48 ms
15/200 ms
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
United Kingdom
15/200 ms
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 Appendix G Market profile attributes
ISDN line services
shows the network-based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each.
Table 108 ISDN line services
MCDN over PRI (SL-1)
DPNSS
Basic call
DASS2
ETSI QSIG
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic call
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic call
DDI
•
•
•
•
Basic call
DDI
DDI
DDI
Name display
Number display
Centralized voice mail
Camp-on
Diversion
Redirection
Originating line identity (OLI)
Terminating line identity (TLI)
Call charge indication (CCI)
Name display
Number display
Centralized voice
mail
Call charge rate indication
(CCRD)
•
•
•
•
•
Call offer
ISDN call connection limit
Network call transfer
Break-in
Loop avoidance
Executive intrusion
Three party
Trunk route optimization
(TRO)
Route optimization
•
Trunk anti-tromboning
Table 109 ISDN services by protocol
Protocol
Market profile
Available ISDN services
•
•
NI
•
•
Canada
•
North America
•
•
•
Basic call
DID
•
•
Number display
ONN blocking
Caribbean
Name display
ETSI
Euro
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Australia
Brazil
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mexico
•
•
•
Basic call
DDI
•
AOC-E (specific changes
for Holland and Italy)
New Zealand
Norway
•
•
•
•
MCID
CLIP
CALA
Subaddressing (on
S-loop)
Denmark
France
Germany
Global
Poland
•
ETSI call diversion
(partial rerouting)
COLP
CLIR
PRC
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Holland
Hong Kong
Italy
United Kingdom
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G Market profile attributes 375
Analog and digital trunk types
Table 110 provides a description of the types of analog and digital trunks.
Note that some of the analog and digital trunks are available only when you select specific market
profiles.
Table 110 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)
Trunk types
Description
Digital trunk types:
T1/E1
Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1.544 Mb/s (North America); 30 channels at
2,048 Mb/s (Europe)
Loop, E&M, DID, and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines.
You can program auto-answer T1 loop start, T1 E&M trunks, T1 DID, T1 ground start trunks,
PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass (calling directly to a
department or individual) and line concentration (one trunk can map onto several target
lines).
DID
A type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM
system.
Loop
A type of T1 line that is used on systems where the service provider supports disconnect
supervision for the digital loop start trunks.
These trunks provide remote access to the BCM system from the public network. These
trunks must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to auto-answer, which
provides the remote access portal.
Ground
T1-groundstart trunk.
These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks, but are used when the local service
provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks. Ground start
trunks work with T1 only. By configuring lines as ground start, the system recognizes when a
call is released at the far end.
E&M
PRI
T1 and E&M. This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections to other
phone systems.
This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode.
ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 Mb/s (in Europe: 30 B-channels
and 1 D-channels at 2.048 Mb/s).
These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are
auto-answer trunks.
BRI
ISDN loop that provides both T and S reference point loops.
These loops can support both network (T and S loops) and terminal equipment (S-Loop)
connections.
This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network. ETSI ISDN
BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN
service. BRI provides two bearer B-channels operating at 64 Kb/s and a data D-channel
which operates at 16 Kb/s. The D-channel is used primarily to carry call information. Like
loop start trunks, BRI lines can be configured as manual-answer or auto-answer.
DASS2
(British) Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network.
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 Appendix G Market profile attributes
Table 110 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)
Trunk types
Description
DPNSS
A digital private network signaling system, which allows phone systems from different
manufacturers to be tied together over E1 lines, offering significant enhancements to BCM
networking capabilities.
DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private networks
for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls. Its routing capabilities
provide more of the larger-network capabilities without the expense of installing a new
system, reconfiguring all the nodes, and worrying about a lot of downtime. Most functionality
over DPNSS lines is transparent once the DPNSS is programmed into the system.
DPNSS allows a local node, acting as a terminating node, to communicate with other PBXs
over the network using E1 lines. For example, corporate offices separated geographically
can be linked over DPNSS lines to other BCM systems, bypassing the restrictions of the
PSTNs to which they may be connected. This allows connected BCM systems to function
like a private network.
Analog trunk types:
Loop start Standard PSTN telephone line.
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
377
Index
Numbers
1120E
analog telephone
1140E
ASM
2001
2002
2004
ATA2
2007
2033
2050
2210,2211,2212
4x16
B
base unit
A
accessories
BRI
American Society of Composers, Authors and
Publishers, music-on-hold licence 20
analog device specifications
BRIM
C
caller ID
analog station media bay module, ASM8/ASM8+/
GASM8 58
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 Index
digital trunk module
CAP
dip switch settings
configuration
DN
cooling fan
DNs
cordless
cordless telephones
DS30 channels
CTM
D
DSM
DSM16
DDIM
DSM32
default gateway
DTM
digital mobility
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
379
E
H
handset
emergency telephone
hard disk
environment
hardware
extensions
I
Industry Canada
install
F
fax
FCC
installing
FEM
IP Phone
field replaceable units
FRU
IP telephone
G
ISDN
GATM
J
jack
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 Index
L
language
lease time
media bay modules
LED
LEDs
line
memory button
line numbers
line services
lines
modem card
M
main unit
modules
MSC
maintenance
music source
MBM
music-on-hold
N
network
networking
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
381
O
one-line display
relay jack
repair
P
replace
replacing
PCI
peripherals
ports
S
safety extra low voltage (SELV)
scope status
PRI
process map
programming
specifications
PSTN
Q
station media bay module
QoS routing
R
RAID upgrade kit
station modules
regions
BCM200/400 4.0 Installation and Maintenance Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 Index
WINS server
T
T1
wireless LAN
telephone
wiring
telephones
wiring chart
Telset Admin
tools
trunk modules
two-line display
U
W
WAN
N0060612
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|